Multi Tech Equipment Modem ISIHI 2S User Manual

MultiModemISI Hybrid Series  
Model ISIHI-2S  
88301150  
Copyright © 1998 by Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1—Introduction  
Welcome to Multi-Tech’s ISIHI-2S.................................................................................................................... 6  
Modem Description/Features ........................................................................................................................... 7  
TerminalAdapter Description/Features ............................................................................................................ 8  
Manual Organization...................................................................................................................................... 10  
Technical Specifications................................................................................................................................. 12  
Physical / Electrical / Environmental.......................................................................................................... 12  
Modem...................................................................................................................................................... 12  
TerminalAdapter ....................................................................................................................................... 14  
Chapter 2—Hardware Installation  
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 16  
Computer Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 16  
Shipping Contents..................................................................................................................................... 16  
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................................ 16  
Before You Start ............................................................................................................................................ 17  
Determine Current System Settings.......................................................................................................... 18  
Installing the ISIHI-2S .................................................................................................................................... 19  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 22  
Installing ISIHI-2S Drivers in Windows NT ..................................................................................................... 23  
Installing Terminal Adapters and Modems to COM Ports in Windows NT ................................................. 25  
Removing the Driver ................................................................................................................................. 30  
Installing ISIHI-2S Drivers in Windows 95...................................................................................................... 31  
Installing Terminal Adapters and Modems to COM Ports in Windows 95 .................................................. 39  
Removing the Driver ................................................................................................................................. 43  
Configuring the Terminal Adapter ................................................................................................................... 44  
Before You Start........................................................................................................................................ 44  
To Configure the Terminal Adapter ............................................................................................................ 46  
ISDN TA Configuration Utility .............................................................................................................. 46  
ConfigMenu Configuration Utility ........................................................................................................ 50  
AT Commands.................................................................................................................................... 51  
NetWare Connect (Novell) Driver Installation................................................................................................. 52  
Configuring Ports for NetWare Connect .................................................................................................... 53  
Removing the Driver (Novell) .................................................................................................................... 53  
SCO Open Server 5 Driver Installation .......................................................................................................... 54  
The Multi-Tech Installation Script .............................................................................................................. 55  
Activating Ports in SCO Open Server 5 .................................................................................................... 57  
Removing the Driver (SCO Open Server 5) .............................................................................................. 57  
Multi_Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................................... 58  
Administration Utility ................................................................................................................................. 61  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, and Result Codes  
Modem AT Commands .................................................................................................................................. 64  
Modem S-Registers ....................................................................................................................................... 83  
Modem Result Codes .................................................................................................................................... 89  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, and Result Codes  
Terminal Adapter AT Commands.................................................................................................................... 92  
Terminal Adapter S-Registers ...................................................................................................................... 105  
Terminal Adapter Result Codes ................................................................................................................... 108  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting  
.................................................................................................................................................................... 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 118  
Limited Warranty.......................................................................................................................................... 118  
Service ........................................................................................................................................................ 119  
The Multi-Tech BBS ..................................................................................................................................... 119  
Upgrading the ISIHI-2S with FlashPro ......................................................................................................... 121  
About CompuServe ..................................................................................................................................... 121  
About the Internet ........................................................................................................................................ 121  
Appendix  
Appendix A: Determining Current System Settings ...................................................................................... 124  
Appendix B: Base I/O Switch Settings ......................................................................................................... 125  
Appendix C: Pin Assignments...................................................................................................................... 129  
Appendix D: ISIHI-2S Testing Utilities .......................................................................................................... 130  
Appendix E: Configuration Profiles ............................................................................................................. 133  
Appendix F: Ordering ISDN BRI (2B+D) Lines ............................................................................................ 138  
Appendix G: ASCII Conversion Chart .......................................................................................................... 149  
Appendix H: Dial Pulses and Tones ............................................................................................................. 150  
Appendix I: AT Command Summary (Modem) ............................................................................................. 152  
Appendix J: S-Register Summary (Modem)................................................................................................. 157  
Appendix K: Result Code Summary (Modem) ............................................................................................. 158  
Appendix L: AT Command Summary (TA) ................................................................................................... 160  
Appendix M: S-Register Summary (TA) ....................................................................................................... 165  
Appendix N: Result Codes (TA) ................................................................................................................... 166  
Appendix O: Regulatory Agency Information ............................................................................................... 167  
Glossary  
.................................................................................................................................................................... 170  
Index  
.................................................................................................................................................................... 182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
elcome to Multi-Tech’s  
new MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, model ISIHI-2S, a multiport hybrid ISDN card for  
Remote Access Server (RAS) applications. Included on the ISIHI-2S are four V.90/  
K56flex central site modems for incoming analog modem and fax calls, as well as two  
W
terminal adapters. Each terminal adapter appears as two ports to the server PC using the  
ISIHI-2S. The terminal adapters identify incoming analog calls and route them to the  
central site modems. The card also supports dial-out applications via the modems or  
terminal adapters.  
The ISIHI-2S card features eight RAS ports using two Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ISDN  
lines. The eight ports allow a server to accept any combination of analog modem and  
digital ISDN calls, giving the user the flexibility to customize the settings of the terminal  
adapters and modems. Since the two BRI lines constitute only four Bearer channels, only  
four of the eight ports can be active at any one time. The two terminal adapters handle  
the four B-channels as four independent data connections (see diagram below).  
Com Ports  
5
ISDN  
Modem  
RJ-45 jack  
1
2
TA  
Line 1  
6
7
Modem  
Modem  
RJ-45 jack  
3
4
TA  
Line 2  
8
Modem  
6
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
From the perspective of the server PC, the ISIHI-2S is an 8-port serial card with eight  
devices permanently attached to the serial ports. The first four ports are the two terminal  
adapters, each of which appear as two ports. The remaining four ports are the four  
central site modems. The chart below summarizes the correlation of ports and devices.  
Port Number  
Device  
ISDN Line Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TA  
TA  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
TA  
TA  
Modem  
Modem  
Modem  
Modem  
The ISIHI-2S server card is ideal for use in PC network environments because it provides  
an integrated hardware solution for remote access for both Windows NT and Novell-  
based LANs. To ensure smooth Novell network integ/ration, the ISIHI-2S ships with a  
NetWare Loadable Module for NetWare Connect™ communication server that enables it  
to support state-of-the-art features such as remote dialing and modem pooling. The  
ISIHI-2S easily integrates into the Windows NT platform since it fully supports Microsoft’s  
Remote Access Server software, which allows it to operate comfortably with popular  
network protocols such as TCP/IP and Net BIOS. The ISIHI-2S ships with drivers for  
other multiuser operating systems such as SCO®UNIX®.  
This Owner’s Manual will help you install, configure, test, and use the ISIHI2-S. The  
manual contains product specifications, installation instructions, and technical support  
information to assist you in the installation process. This manual is written for audiences  
with basic PC skills; therefore, step-by-step instructions for basic operations such as  
logging in and file editing are not included.  
Modem Description/Features  
ISIHI-2S modems include an Intel 20 MHz 80186 processor and 254K of RAM that work  
dynamically to allocate resources to the most active modems.  
Simple to install, the ISIHI-2S can be used to add multiport, Enhanced V.34 modem  
communications to a network host or server as easily as plugging in an expansion card,  
loading the driver software, and connecting the phone lines.  
The ISIHI-2S contains four modems, which meet the proposed Enhanced V.34 ITU  
standard for data signalling rates as high as 33.6/31.2 Kbps full-duplex mode. They  
support and are compatible with EIA extended Automode, adaptive line probing,  
automatic symbol rate and carrier frequency during startup, and retrain and rate  
renegotiation (in 2400 bps increments.)  
The ISIHI-2S features CCITT V.42 error correction and V.42bis data compression,  
providing 100% error-free data transmission. V.42 error correction incorporates MNP  
Classes 3 and 4 and LAP-M. You can select V.42bis data compression for 4-1 throughput  
or MNP Class 5 for 2-1 throughput.  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
ISIHI-2S modems offer interactive automatic dialing as well as Command Mode option  
configuration. You can store up to ten command line/telephone numbers (up to 60  
characters each) in the ISIHI-2S’s nonvolatile memory.  
ISIHI-2S modems offer pulse or tone dialing and recognize dial tones and busy signals  
for reliable call-progress detection. They detect AT&T calling card tones and are FCC-  
registered for connecting to telephone networks without Data Access Arrangements  
(DAAs).  
They also feature Remote Configuration, which allows you to assist users at remote  
sites, saving you the time and trouble of site visits and preventing misinterpretation of  
configuration instructions.  
The ISIHI-2S meets the CCITT V.17 standard for sending and receiving faxes. When  
lined to a compatible fax machine or modem, ISIHI-2S modems can transmit faxes at  
14.4 Kbps. They meet the CCITT’s Group 3 Designation for sending and receiving faxes  
at 9600 bps and Group 2 Designation for sending and receiving faxes at 1800 bps. The  
ISIHI-2S also is downward-compatible to speeds as low as 300 bps, so you can send  
and receive faxes with virtually any fax machine in the world.  
Terminal Adapter Description/Features  
ISIHI-2S terminal adapters have S/T ports to connect to the ISDN network and analog  
ports to connect to a telephone, modem, or fax machine. They ship with a software  
configuration utility for Windows® 95, Windows NT, and ConfigMenu (a built-in  
configuration utility for DOS and Windows 3.x operating systems). The TAs also accept  
AT commands, enabling them to use the same communications software as analog  
modems.  
ISIHI-2S terminal adapters are compatible with EuroISDN switch protocol. They  
communicate using ISDN BRI (2B+D) service, which provides up to 128 Kbps data and  
voice communications. They automatically detect whether an incoming call is voice or  
data and handle it appropriately.  
The ISIHI-2S terminal adapters communicate over public ISDN telephone lines. Features  
include the following:  
• Compatibility with NET3, AT&T 5ESS, NT DMS-100, US National ISDN-1switch  
protocols  
• Automatically detect if incoming call is voice or data  
• ISDN BRI (2B+D)  
• AT command and S-Register controls and Result Code responses  
• Use the same communications software as existing analog modems  
• V.120, PPP, or X.75 compatible  
• Supports PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) high speed ISDN connections  
• Windows NT and Windows 95 software utility and a firmware utility for easy ISDN line  
configuration  
8
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
• Flash PROM for easy firmware upgrades  
• Automatic detection of the data protocol for answering incoming data calls  
• Embedded protocol analyzer for troubleshooting the connection to the ISDN network  
The ISDN TAs provide data communication using Basic Rate Interface (BRI). They  
provide two 64 Kbps bearer channels for voice or data and one 16 Kbps D channel for  
signaling information (2B+D) and are compatible with V.120, PPP, and X.75.  
The TAs provides dial-up asynchronous communication capability with other personal  
computers, terminals, on-line computer services, or other types of computer systems.  
What is a S/T-Interface? An ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) U-Loop consists of 2 conductors  
from the CO (telephone company central office) to the customer premises. Equipment on  
both sides of the U-loop is carefully designed to deal with the long length of the U-loop  
and the noisy environment it operates in. At the customer premises, the U-loop is  
terminated by an NT1 (network termination 1) device. An NT1 (network terminator 1) is a  
device that provides an interface between the two-wire twisted-pairs used by telephone  
companies in their ISDN BRI network and an end-user’s four wire terminal equipment.  
The NT1 drives an S/T-bus that usually is 4 wires but in some cases may be 6 or 8 wires.  
The name of the S/T bus comes from the letters used in the ISDN specifications to refer  
to two reference points, S and T. Point T refers to the connection between the NT1  
device and customer supplied equipment. Terminals can connect directly to NT1 at point  
T, or there may be a PBX (private branch exchange, e.g., a customer-owned telephone  
exchange). When a PBX is present, point S refers to the connection between the PBX  
and the terminal.  
Note that in ISDN terminology, terminal can mean any sort of end-user ISDN device,  
such as data terminals, telephones, FAX machines, etc. The following diagram reflects  
interface points in a typical ISDN network.  
Point S  
4–8 wires  
Point T  
4–8 wires  
Point U  
4–8 wires  
NT2  
(PBX)  
NT2  
Terminal  
Point S  
Terminal  
Point S  
Terminal  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
Manual Organization  
Chapter 1–Introduction  
Introduces and describes the ISIHI-2S. It describes features, provides manual  
organization, and lists technical specifications.  
Chapter 2–Hardware Installation  
Describes how to install the ISIHI-2S card into the ISA bus of your personal computer  
system and how to configure card settings (I/O address DIP switch setting and jumper  
setting). This chapter also provides you with procedures for physically connecting the  
ISIHI-2S to the ISDN BRI line.  
Chapter 3–Software/Driver Installation  
Chapter 3 provides detailed steps to install software/drivers to configure and operate the  
ISIHI-2S via its firmware-based ConfigMenu utility or software-based ISDN TA  
Configuration Wizard.  
Chapter 4–Modem AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Provides an introduction to the ISIHI-2S’s modems command mode fundamentals  
followed by a detailed explanation of each AT command with examples where applicable.  
This chapter also describes the modem’s S-registers, which are used to store various  
modem options, and result codes that report the results of a command.  
Chapter 5–Terminal Adapter AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Provides an introduction to the ISIHI-2S’s terminal adapters command mode  
fundamentals followed by a detailed explanation of each AT command with examples  
where applicable. This chapter also describes the TA’s S-registers, which are used to  
store various modem options, and result codes that report the results of a command.  
Chapter 6–Troubleshooting Guide  
If you think your ISIHI-2S is not working correctly, this chapter covers common problems  
and how to solve them.  
Chapter 7–Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Provides information on the ISIHI-2S warranty, instructions for getting the ISIHI-2S  
serviced at the factory, and procedures for firmware upgrades via FlashROM. It also  
contains information on Multi-Tech’s Bulletin Board Service (BBS), how to access  
technical support via the Internet, and information on Multi-Tech’s Fax-Back Service.  
Appendix A–Determining Current System Settings  
Appendix B–Base I/O Switch Settings  
Appendix C–Pin Assignments  
Appendix D–ISIHI-2S Testing Utilities  
Appendix E–Configuration Profiles  
Appendix F–Ordering ISDN BRI (2B+D) Lines  
Appendix G–ASCII Conversion Chart  
Appendix –Dial Pulses and Tones  
Appendix I–Modem AT Command Summary  
Appendix J–Modem S-Register Summary  
10  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
Appendix K–Modem Result Code Summary  
Appendix L–Terminal Adapter AT Command Summary  
Appendix M–Terminal Adapter S-Register Summary  
Appendix N–Terminal Adapter Result Code Summary  
Appendix O–Regulatory Agency Information  
Glossary  
Index  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
Technical Specifications  
Physical / Electrical / Environmental  
Dimensions:  
Baud Rates:  
Bus Type:  
13.3" x 4.8" x .6" (33.3 cm x 12.2 cm x 1.5 cm)  
200 to 115.2 Kbps per port  
ISA  
Environmental:  
Temperature: 0° to 50° C (32° to 120° F)  
Humidity range: 20–90% (noncondensing)  
Power:  
1.5 amps @ +5vDC  
Base I/O:  
Address:  
Interrupt:  
Request:  
Warranty:  
One 16-byte address space per card  
Valid options range from 100h to 3F0h (DIP-switch setting)  
One IRQ per card. Valid options  
Include 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12, and 15  
Two years  
Modem  
Data Rates (Modem)  
Four independent modems each operating as follows:  
Downloads at speeds to 56 Kbps when calling a fully digital  
V.90 or K56flex server or V.90 (actual connect speed depends  
on line conditions). Uploads and other connections at 33600,  
3200, 28800, 26400, 24,000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,  
12000, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, or 0-300 bps  
Data Rates (Fax)  
14400, 9600, 4800, and 2400 bps  
Data Format (Modem) Serial, binary, asynchronous at all data rates  
Configuration Each of the card’s modems is independently configurable  
Compatibility (Modem) ITU-T V.42bis, V.42, V.34, ITU-T V.32bis, V.32, V.25bis, V.21,  
V.22bis, V.22, V.23, V.17, Bell 212A* and 103/113*, K56flex  
Compatibility (Fax)  
ITU-T Group 3, T.4, T.30, V.21, V.27ter, V.29, V.17, and EIA  
TR29.2  
Error Correction  
Data Compression  
Speed Conversion  
ITU-T V.42 (MNP® Classes 3 and 4, and LAP-M)  
ITU-T V.42bis (4:1 throughput) or MNP 5 (2:1 throughput)  
Serial port data rates adjustable to 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,  
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps  
Flow Control  
XON/XOFF, CTS/RTS  
Mode of Operation  
Half or full duplex over dial-up lines, automatic or manual  
dialing, automatic or manual answer  
12  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
Intelligent Features  
Fully AT command compatible, auto dial, redial, repeat dial,*  
pulse or tone dial, dial pauses, call status display, auto-parity  
and data rate selection, keyboard-controlled modem options,  
nonvolatile memory, on-screen displays of modem parameters,  
stored telephone numbers, and help menus  
AT Commands  
100% compatible with standard AT command set  
40 characters  
Command Buffer  
Automatic Dialing  
Modem Modulations  
Standard AT command asynchronous dialing  
FSK at 300 bps, PSK at 1200 bps, QAM at 2400, 4800, and  
9600 bps (non-trellis), QAM with trellis-coded modulation  
(TCM) at 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000,  
26400, 28800, 31200, 33600, plus K56flex speeds  
Fax Modulations  
V.21 CH2 FSK at 300 bps  
V.27ter DPSK at 4800 and 2400 bps  
V.29 QAM at 9600 and 7200 bps  
V.17TCM at 14400, 12000, 9600, and 7200 bps  
Carrier Frequencies ITU-T V.34  
1600, 1646, 1680, 1800, 1829, 1867, 1920, 1959, 2000 Hz  
Carrier Frequencies AT&T V.32terbo/ITU-T V.32bis/V.32  
1800 Hz  
Carrier Frequencies V.22bis/V.22 or Bell 212A Standard(2400 & 1200 bps)  
Transmit originate: 2400 Hz  
Transmit answer: 2400 Hz  
Receive originate: 1200 Hz  
Receive answer: 1200 Hz  
Carrier Frequencies Bell 103/113 (300 bps)  
Transmit originate: 1270 Hz mark, 1070 Hz space  
Receive originate: 2225 Hz mark, 2025 Hz space  
Transmit answer: 2225 Hz mark, 2025 Hz space  
Receive answer: 1270 Hz mark, 1070 Hz space  
Carrier Frequencies V.21  
Transmit originate: 980 Hz mark , 1180 Hz space  
Receive originate: 1650 Hz space, 1850 Hz mark  
Transmit answer: 1650 Hz mark, 1850 Hz mark  
Receive answer: 980 Hz mark, 1180 Hz space  
Fax Carrier Frequencies V.23  
Transmit originate: 390 Hz mark , 450 Hz space  
Receive originate: 1300 Hz space, 2100 Hz mark  
Transmit answer: 1300 Hz mark, 2100 Hz mark  
Receive answer: 390 Hz mark, 450 Hz space  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1– Introduction  
Fax Carrier Frequencies  
V.21CH2 (half duplex)  
1650 Hz mark, 1850 Hz space for transmit originate  
1650 Hz mark, 1850 Hz space for transmit answer  
V.27ter: 1800 Hz originate/answer  
V.29 QAM: 1700 Hz originate/answer  
V.17 TCM: 1800 Hz originate/answer  
Transmit Level  
-13 dBm  
Frequency Stability  
Receiver Sensitivity  
+0.01%  
-43 dBm under worst case conditions  
AGC Dynamic Range 43 dB  
Interface  
TIA / EIA RS-232/ITU-T V.24/V.28  
Diagnostics  
Power-on self-test, local analog loop, local digital loop, remote  
digital loop  
Firmware Upgrades  
Flash memory, available on Multi-Tech’s BBS and website  
Terminal Adapter  
Compatibility  
AT&T 5ESS, NT DMS-100, NTT INSnet64, US National  
ISDN-1, NET 3  
Network Interface  
Protocols  
4-wire S/T interface  
V.120, PPP, and X.75 compatible  
Data Rates  
300, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 56K, 57.6K, 64K,  
115.2K , 230.4K, and 460.8 Kbps  
Async Data Format  
7 bit data + odd/even parity + 1 start/stop. 36 baud rate/parity  
settings via S-Register. Baud rates of 460.8 Kbps with even,  
space, mark, odd, or no parity.  
Data Connections  
Command Interface  
Two ISDN B-channels, One ISDN D-channel  
AT commands, S-Registers, Result Codes, ConfigMenu  
firmware configuration utility, Windows 95/NT software  
configuration utility, Windows 95 Dial-Up Networking (DUN)  
Hardware Connectors ISDN: RJ-45 female receptacle - 4 wire S/T  
Basic Rate Interface  
14  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
2
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
Introduction  
This chapter describes how to install the ISIHI-2S card into the ISA bus on your personal  
computer. Hardware installation involves the following:  
• Opening your PC  
• Setting card configuration (determining I/O address DIP-switch setting and IRQ jumper  
setting)  
• Installing the card into the PC  
Computer Requirements  
• 386, 486, or Pentium®-based PC or compatible with ISA Bus Architecture  
• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows NT 4.0, SCO Open Server version 5.0, or Novell  
NetWare  
• At least one floppy drive  
• 800 blocks of hard disk space for UNIX, 100K bytes for Windows NT, 34K bytes for  
Windows 95, and 50K bytes for Novell  
Shipping Contents  
• ISIHI-2S card  
• Two RJ-45 ISDN cords  
• ISIHI Driver Disk Set with ISDN TA Configuration Wizard  
• Quick Start Guide  
Safety Warnings  
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed  
for wet locations.  
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has  
been disconnected at the network interface.  
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.  
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There  
may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.  
• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of that leak.  
• Ports that are connected to other apparatus are defined as SELV. To ensure conformity  
to EN 41003, ensure that these ports are only connected to the same type on the other  
apparatus.  
16  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
Before You Start  
Warning: Direct interconnection (or connection by way of other apparatus) of ports  
marked SAFETY WARNING see instructions for use with any other ports (whether  
similarly marked or not) may produce hazardous conditions on the network. Multi-Tech  
strongly urges you to consult a qualified engineer before attempting to make this type of  
connection.  
• All installation must be done by a qualified service person.  
To reduce emissions, use blanking plates to cover empty slots in the your PC.  
• Cable, wiring, and any other apparatus connected between the modem and the point of  
connection to any speech band circuit shall comply with the following:  
1. The overall characteristics of the apparatus shall be such as to introduce no material  
effect upon the electrical conditions presented to one another by the modem and the  
speech band circuit.  
2. The apparatus shall be comprised of only  
a. apparatus approved for the purpose of connection between the modem and a  
speech band circuit; and  
b. cable and wiring complying with a code of practice for the installation of  
equipment covered by this part of BS 6328 or such other requirements as may be  
applicable.  
Note: Such apparatus may have been approved subject to limitations in its use.  
Note: If S/T-interface ISDN network connection cable is used, the ISDN phone cord  
should be connected between the ISDN network connection cable and NT1 device.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
Determine Current System Settings  
When you install a device into your computer, the processor must have a means of  
routing information to and from the device, and the device must have a means of gaining  
the processor’s attention. Input/Output (I/O) addresses route information to and from the  
device. Interrupt Requests (IRQs) gain the processor’s attention. The ISIHI-2S card  
requires eight I/O addresses and one IRQ value that are not used by any other device in  
your system. When selecting a unique base I/O address, be sure the next address also  
is unused. To determine your system’s current setting, refer to Appendix A and B.  
If you are certain these settings are not already in use, continue with the hardware  
installation. Each card is shipped with the IRQ set at 10 and the base I/O address set at  
210 hex. Check your system’ssettings to see if these values can be used. If the defaults  
are already in use, select a unique IRQ and I/O address and record them below for future  
reference.  
I/O address _____________ IRQ ___________________  
Recommended Base I/O Address and IRQ Values  
ISIHI-2S  
Base I/O Address  
IRQ  
10  
11  
12  
15  
Initial 8 port board  
First 8 port upgrade  
Second 8 port upgrade  
Third 8 port upgrade  
210h  
220h  
230h  
240h  
18  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
Installing the ISIHI-2S  
Installing the ISIHI-2S includes setting the I/O address DIP switches and the IRQ jumper.  
You can skip this this section if you select the default values. Default values are I/O  
address: 210 hex and IRQ: 10.  
1. Before handling the ISIHI-2S, discharge any static in your body by toucing a piece of  
grounded metal such as the computer chassis.  
2. Carefully remove the ISIHI-2S from its anti-static bag, handling it only by the  
mounting bracket and edges. Do not touch the gold-plated connectors along the  
bottom edge. (You may want to save packaging for future use.)  
3. Visually inspect the ISIHI-2S. If you have any concerns about its condition, call  
Technical Support at (612) 717-5863.  
4. Make sure your computer and any peripheral equipment connected to it are turned  
off. Failure to do so can damage both the ISIHI-2S card and your PC.  
You can install the ISIHI-2S in a PC-AT, 386, 486, or Pentium equivalent ISA bus  
computer.  
5. Remove the cover of your computer as instructed in your computer’s documentation.  
6. Locate the unused slot you will be using for your ISIHI-2S card and remove the slot  
cover according to instructions in your computer’s documentation.  
7. Check the settings of the I/O address switch and the IRQ jumper to ensure they are  
set properly for your installation.  
8. The default for the ISIHI-2S’s base I/O address is 210 hex. The default value for the  
IRQ jumper is 10. Choose the IRQ value by covering the appropriate pins with the  
jumper plug (supplied). Refer to the figure below, if needed. If your system requires a  
different setting, or if you are installing multiple cards, refer to Appendix B for a table  
of valid address settings.  
OPEN  
IRQ  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
7 10 11 1215  
2 3 4 5  
Record any changes you make to these settings for future reference and for software  
installation (Chapter 3).  
9. Install the ISIHI-2S card in the selected expansion slot in the same manner as any  
other add-on card according to your computer’s documentation.  
10. Fasten the retaining bracket to the computer chassis and replace the cover.  
11. Connect the ISIHI-2S to your ISDN telelphone wall jack with the provided modular  
telephone cable.  
Note: The ISIHI-2S communicates over ISDN lines. If you do not have a standard  
modular wall jack near your computer, you should install one or have one installed by  
your telephone company. In the US, installation kits and adapters are available wherever  
telephones are sold.  
12. Turn on the power to the computer. Now you are ready to install the software/drivers.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
20  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software/Driver Installation  
3
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Introduction  
This chapter contains general instructions for software/driver installation the following  
operating systems:  
• Windows NT  
• Windows 95  
• Novell  
• SCO Open Server 5  
This guide assumes installers have a thorough knowledge of their operating system and  
the software installation process; therefore, it does not include every dialaog box or  
option involved in installing and configuring the drivers.  
The ISIHI-2S card ships with software/drivers for Windows NT, Windows 95, SCO Open  
Server 5, and NetWare Connect (Novell) operating systems. This chapter guides you  
through the installation of these drivers. The Multi-Tech Installation Script, used in the  
UNIX operating system, is located on page 55 of this chapter.  
As with all software, you should make a backup copy of the diskette you received and  
use the copy for the installation. If you received a 3½" diskette, the capacity is 1.44 MB.  
Consult your system manual for instructions on disk copying. Also, if you have a numeric  
keypad, and you intend to use it for the installation process, make sure Num Lock is on.  
Installing a device driver consists of modifying your system. For this reason, only the  
super user (system administrator) is allowed to perform the installation. If you cannot  
login as the root, you must find the person in your organization who has this  
authorization (i.e., password). To begin the driver installation, login as root. Then  
proceed with the appropriate section.  
22  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Installing ISIHI-2S Drivers in Windows NT  
1. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel, and then double-click the Add/Remove  
Programs icon.  
2. The Add/Remove Program Properties dialog box appears. In the Install/Uninstall  
tab, click Install.  
3. The Install Program From Floppy Disk or CD-ROM dialog box appears. If installing  
from diskette, insert the diskette labeled MultiModem ISI Driver for Windows NT in  
the disk drive. Then click Next.  
(If installing from a network location, connect to it. Note drive. You may need it later if  
you run Setup again.)  
4. When the Run Installation Program dialog box appears, click Finish and the driver  
installs.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
5. When the Information dialog box below appears, click OK.  
6. The ISI Cards dialog box appears. Click Add.  
7. The Add Card dialog box appears, displaying defaults—Ports: 8, I/O Base: 210, and  
IRQ: 10. Click Done and then Close.  
Note: The ISIHI-2S contains 8 ports. Make sure the default is 8.  
8. The ISI Card dialog box appears. Click Restart Now to restart the driver. Then click  
OK.  
The ISI driver now is installed and you are ready to install the TAs and modems to the  
COM ports.  
24  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Installing Terminal Adapters and Modems to COM Ports in Windows NT  
To install terminal adapters:  
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Modems icon.  
2. The Modem Properties dialog box appears. Click Add.  
3. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Check the box marked Don’t detect  
my modem; I will select it from a list and click Next.  
4. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Click Have Disk.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
5. The Install From Disk dialog box appears. Click OK (diskette should still be in drive).  
6. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. From the Models list, select a protocol  
(depending on your application) for the terminal adapters. Then click Next.  
7. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Select the first four COM ports; then  
click Next. The terminal adapters (screen displays modems) install to the selected  
COM ports.  
8. After the terminal adapters are installed, click Finish to return to the General tab  
where you can view COM port assignments (and make changes if necessary). You  
now are ready to install the modems.  
26  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
To install modems:  
1. In the General tab, click Add.  
2. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Check the box marked Don’t detect  
my modem; I will select it from a list. Then click Next.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
3. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. From the Models list, select Central  
Site Modems for the modems. Then click Next.  
4. Select the next four COM ports; then click Next. The modems install to the selected  
COM ports.  
5. After the modems are installed to the ports, click Finish to return to the General tab  
where you can view COM port assignments (and make changes if necessary).  
6. Close the Modem Properties dialog box. The message below appears asking if you  
want to configure dial-up networking. Click Yes.  
28  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
7. The Remote Access Setup dialog box appears. Click Add.  
8. Each COM port appears in a separate Add RAS Device dialog box. To add the  
highlighted device, click OK.  
9. The Remote Access Setup dialog box displays again. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until  
until all devices are added.  
10. When all devices are added, click Continue.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
11. When the message below appears, click Yes.  
The ISI Cards icon appears in the Control Panel and you now are ready to configure  
the terminal adapter. Go to page 44.  
Removing the Driver  
1. Click Settings, Control Panel; then double-click Add/Remove Programs.  
2. From the list box, select ISICOM Driver.  
3. Click Add/Remove and follow screen instructions.  
30  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Installing ISIHI-2S Drivers in Windows 95  
1. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel, and then double-click the Add/Remove  
Programs icon.  
2. The Add/Remove Program Properties dialog box appears. In the Install /Uninstall  
tab, click Install.  
3. The Install Program From Floppy Disk or CD-ROM dialog box appears. If installing  
from diskette, insert the diskette labeled MultiModemISI Driver for Windows 95 &  
Netware AIO in the disk drive. Then click Next. (If installing from a network location,  
connect to it. Note drive; you may need it later if you run Setup again.)  
4. The Run Installation Program dialog box appears. In the command line, enter  
A:\WIN95\Setup.exe. Click Finish and the driver installs.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
5. The Welcome dialog box appears. Click Next.  
6. The ISI Card Port Count dialog box appears. Make sure the 8 Ports option is  
selected; then click Next.  
32  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
7. The Destination Directory dialog box appears. Click Next.  
8. The Start Copying Files dialog box appears. Click Next.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
9. The ISI Driver Setup dialog box appears. Click OK.  
10. The ISI Driver Setup dialog box appears instructing you to set the base address and  
IRQ for the card. Click OK.  
11. The Systems Properties dialog box appears. In Device Manager, double-click  
MultiTech ISI Card in Multiport to change settings.  
34  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
12. The MultiTech ISI Card Properties dialog box appears. Click Resources. Then click  
Set Configuration Manually.  
13. In the Resources settings: list, select Input/Output Range; then click Change  
Setting.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
14. The Edit Input/Output Range dialog box appears. Click the arrows (up or down) to  
select the value that matches the ISIHI-2S card’s I/O address. (If you used the default  
I/O address, this value is 210. Otherwise, refer to the settings you recorded on page  
18.) When finished, click OK to return to the Resources settings: list.  
15. In the Resources settings: list, select Interrupt Request; then click Change  
Setting.  
36  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
16. The Edit Interrupt Request dialog box appears. Select the value that matches the  
ISIHI-2S card’s IRQ. (If you selected the default IRQ, this value is 10. Otherwise,  
refer to the settings you recorded on page 18.) Then click OK to return to the  
Resources settings: list.  
17. The MultiTech ISI Card Properties dialog box appears. If settings are correct, click  
OK.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
18. When the System Settings Change dialog box appears, click Yes.  
Drivers now are installed. You are ready to install the TAs and modems to the COM  
ports.  
38  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Installing Terminal Adapters and Modems to COM Ports in Windows 95  
To install terminal adapters:  
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Modems icon.  
2. The Modem Properties dialog box appears. Click Add.  
3. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Check the box marked Other and click  
Next.  
4. The Install New Modem dialog box appears again. Check the box marked Don’t  
detect my modem; I will select it from a list. Click Next.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
5. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Insert the diskette labeled MultiModem  
ISI Driver for Windows 95 & Netware AIO and click Have Disk.  
6. The Install From Disk dialog box appears. In the text box, enter  
A:\WIN95\isihimdm.inf and click OK.  
7. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. From the Models list, select a protocol  
(depending on your application) for the terminal adapters. Then click Next.  
40  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
8. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Select the first four COM ports; then  
click Next. The terminal adapters (screen displays modems) install to the selected  
COM ports.  
9. After the terminal adapters install, click Finish to return to the General tab where you  
can view COM port assignments (and make changes if necessary). You now are  
ready to install the modems.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
To install modems:  
1. In the General tab, click Add.  
2. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Check the box marked Don’t detect  
my modem; I will select it from a list. Then click Next.  
42  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
3. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. From the Models list, select Central  
Site Modems for the modems. Then click Next.  
4. The Install New Modem dialog box appears. Select the next four COM ports and  
click Next. The modems install to the selected COM ports.  
5. After the modems install to the ports, click Finish to return to the General tab where  
you can view COM port assignments (and make changes if necessary). Now you are  
ready to configure the terminal adapters.  
Removing the Driver  
1. Click Settings, Control Panel, and then double-click Add/Remove Programs.  
2. From the list box, select ISICOM Driver.  
3. Click Add/Remove and follow screen instructions.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Configuring the Terminal Adapter  
Before you connect the ISIHI-2S to your network terminator, you must configure it to  
match your ISDN service and the remote TA. You can use any of the following methods:  
• ISDN TA Configuration Utility—recommended for computers with Windows 95 and  
Windows NT, version 4.0 operating systems.  
ConfigMenu—recommended for computers with DOS or Windows 3.x and a VT100/  
ANSI compatible terminal or data communication program that includes VT100/ANSI  
terminal emulation.  
AT Commands—allow you to fine tune TA operation with AT commands and S-  
registers. Enter these commands in your data communication program’s terminal  
mode. AT commands are described in detail in the Chapter 4.  
Before You Start  
Consider the following choices before configuring your TA. Then record your choices  
here and refer to them during configuration.  
Network Configuration  
Network Switch Type _____________________  
Select the network switch type your ISDN service uses at its local central office. You  
can set the TA to NET3, AT&T 5ESS, NT DMS-100, or US National ISDN-1. If you don’t  
know the switch type, get the information from your ISDN service provider.  
AT command: !CO=  
Data TEI _______________________________  
The Data TEI is the TEI (terminal endpoint identifier) assigned to the data channel. You  
can select Auto TEI, a fixed TEI, or Disable. A TEI is a number used by the central  
office switch to uniquely identify each device that is connected to the network. When it  
uses dynamic TEI assignments (Auto TEI), the central office switch assigns a TEI each  
time the TA connects to the network. However, the ISDN service provider may assign a  
fixed TEI at subscription time, in which case you must configure the TA with the fixed  
TEI number. You also can disable the channel, which may be useful when multiple TAs  
are attached to a network terminator bus. AT command: !D3=  
Voice TEI ______________________________  
The Voice TEI is the TEI assigned to the voice channel. You have the same choices as  
for Data TEI: Auto TEI, fixed TEI number, or Disable. AT command: *!D3=  
SPIDs and DNs __________________________  
The TA must be configured with the Service Profile Identifier (SPID). The SPID,  
assigned by the local phone company, is for the specific BRI line where TA is attached.  
The SPID field is empty prior to configuration. AT command: AT!C6= and AT*!C6  
The Directory Number (DN) is the phone number another user would call to contact this  
TA once it is attached to the ISDN. AT commands: AT!N1= and AT*!N1=  
Note: SPIDs only apply for North American switch types.  
44  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Call Control Configuration  
Persistent DTR Dialing ____________________  
A high DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal on the serial port indicates that your  
computer or terminal is ready to communicate with your TA. DTR normally goes high  
when a communication program starts or is ready to dial. Persistent DTR dialing  
enables the TA to automatically redial the number stored in memory location 0  
whenever DTR is high, and the serial port does not have an active call. You can enable  
or disable this feature. AT command: $D  
Auto Answer Data Calls ______________ Rings to Answer _____________  
Select Auto Answer if you want the TA to automatically answer all incoming data calls  
(option does not affect analog port). The Rings to Answer number ( range: 1—255)  
selects number of rings the TA waits before answering an incoming call. Default: 1 ring.  
AT command: S0=  
Dialing Method __________________________  
Select either the Enbloc or the Overlap dialing method for use when establishing a data  
call. Your ISDN provider determines the dialing method. The enbloc method is used for  
most ISDN dialing; however, you can select the overlap method if you are working with  
a private network. AT command: %A97=  
Data Protocol ___________________________  
The data protocol, also known as the B-channel protocol and the rate adaption  
protocol, is the language spoken over each 64 Kbps channel between two ISDN  
devices. The devices on both ends of the ISDN link must use identical protocols. AT  
command: !Z  
V.120 Protocol—provides rates up to 64000 bps on each B channel.  
X.75 Protocol—packet-switched network protocol for international use. Layer 2  
portion commonly is used as a rate adaption protocol.  
PPP Protocol—provides rates up to 64 Kbps per channel.  
Stored Numbers _________________________  
The TA can optionally store as many as 10 phone numbers, up to 20 characters each.  
AT command: &Z=  
Dialing Stored Numbers ___________________  
The TA can dial a number previously stored in directory number n using the &Zn=x  
command. AT command: e.g., DS3  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
To Configure the Terminal Adapter  
You can configure TAs with ISDN TA Configuration utility, ConfigMenu, or with AT  
commands. Instructions for all three are provided in this section.  
ISDN TA Configuration Utility  
1. Before you start the ISDN TA Configuration utility, disconnect the ISIHI-2S by  
removing the RJ-45 cable from the ISDN jack.  
2. Insert the diskette labeled Config Utility (ISDNTA). Click Start, Programs, and then  
the ISDN TA Configuration Utility icon.  
3. The Welcome dialog box appears. Click Next.  
4. The Searching for TA dialog box appears. Click Next.  
46  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
5. The Configuration dialog box appears. Refer to your network configuration notes in  
Before You Start as you enter information to configure both TAs. If you have  
questions about choices, click Help. After entering information in each dialog box,  
click Next.  
6. The Data Protocol Setup dialog box appears. Referring to you network configuation  
notes, enter the appropriate information; then click Next.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
7. The SPID dialog box appears. Referring to your network configuration notes, enter  
the appropriate information; then click Next.  
8. In the Save Configuration dialog box, enter a name to store the configuration. Then  
click Next.  
48  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
9. To load the configuration, click Next in the Load Configuration dialog box.  
10. Then click Finish in the Configured dialog box.  
The first TA now is configured.  
11. Click Back to return to the Configuration dialog box and repeat steps 5 through 10  
to configure the remaining TA(s). If you install multiple ISIHI-2S cards in the same  
PC, you must configure two TAs per card installed. For example, if you install four  
ISIHI-2S cards in one PC, you have to configure eight TAs (two per card).  
12. After both TAs are configured, close the ISDN TA Configuration utility and connect to  
the network again.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
ConfigMenu Configuration Utility  
Use the ConfigMenu configuration utility with computers using DOS or Windows 3.x  
operating systems. ConfigMenu is installed in the TAs as part of the firmware.  
To use ConfigMenu:  
1. Start a data communication program and select the COM port where the TA is  
connected.  
2. In the communication program dialog box, type AT@Config and press ENTER.  
ConfigMenu’s Main Menu appears (see screen below).  
3. To select menu item, type its number and press ENTER. A submenu then appears  
where you can make selections. At the lowest level, you can change a configuration  
option by selecting a number or typing a value and pressing ENTER.  
4. When you finish, close ConfigMenu.  
5. Use the &W command to save your new configuration and to load it automatically  
when the TA is turned on.  
50  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
ConfigMenu Menus  
Network Configuration Menu—configures network parameters such as switch type,  
data and voice TEIs, and data and voice MSNs. When you finish, select Save Network  
Configuration to save your work.  
Call Control Configuration Menu—changes how the TA originates and answers calls.  
Options include Auto Answer, Rings to Answer, Dialing Method, and Persistent DTR  
Dialing.  
Data Protocols Menu—changes the rate adaption protocol used by the TA.  
Stored Numbers Menu—stores up to ten phone numbers ( maximum of 20 characters  
each). Stored number 0 is the phone number that will be dialed if persistent DTR dialing  
is enabled.  
Port Control Configuration Menu—configures TA’s serial port, including how TA  
responds to control signals on the serial interface.  
Help Menu—provides assistance in navigating through the TA menu system or viewing  
the ISIHI-2S’s firmware version numbers.  
AT Commands  
You can configure the terminal adapters using AT commands, just as you would  
configure an analog modem. Use this method if you prefer to work with AT commands or  
if you have a special requirement not addressed by either of the configuration utilities.  
To configure the TAs with AT commands:  
1. Disconnect the ISIHI-2S from the network (remove RJ-45 cables from ISDN jacks).  
2. Start a data communication program and select the first and third COM ports to be  
configured.  
3. Referring to your notes made in Before You Start, enter AT commands in the terminal  
window of the data communications program.  
4. When you finish, use the &W command to save your new configuration and to select  
it to load automatically when the ISIHI-2S is turned on.  
5. Close the data communications program and reconnect the TA to the network  
terminator.  
For more information on AT commands, refer to Chapter 4.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
NetWare Connect (Novell) Driver Installation  
Multi-Tech Systems provides AIO drivers for the ISIHI-2S, so it can function with Novell  
compatible asynchronous applications (e.g., NetWare Connect). The AIO driver is simply  
an NLM (NetWare Loadable Module) that runs on the file server. Drivers must be loaded  
on the file server where the board is installed. Drivers can be loaded from the file server’s  
console prompt or incorporated for autoloading in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file.  
To install the Multi-Tech AIO driver, copy the file AIOISIX.NLM to the system directory of  
the file server from a workstation on the network. To copy, use the following command:  
COPYA:\AIOISIX.NLM F\:SYSTEM  
To load the driver, go to the system or PC console (where the ISIHI-2S is installed) and  
enter the following at the prompt:  
LOAD AIOISIX [port=W] [int=X] [name=Y] [note=Z]  
W is the hexadecimal I/O port address for the ISIHI-2S. The ISIHI-2S occupies the  
next 15 I/O addresses on the bus. That is, if you specify the address 210 hex, then  
the ISIHI-2S occupies addresses from 210 hex to A hex (total of 16 addresses).  
X is the interrupt (IRQ) vector number for the ISIHI-2S. The ISIHI-2S can be set for  
IRQ vectors 10, 11, 12 & 15.  
Y sets the ISIHI-2S board name.  
Z overrides the default node ID number for the ISIHI-2S.  
Note: All these parameters are optional. If none are supplied, the AIO driver assumes the  
default I/O address and IRQ values and tries to load the driver.  
IRQ Jumpers  
Setting IRQs consists of installing the IRQ jumper on the two pins that indicate the  
interrupt vector. For example, IRQ10 is chosen in the configuration below.  
2
3
4
5
7
10  
11  
12  
15  
:
:
:
:
:
[:]  
:
:
:
Error Messages  
1. *Error: An ISIHI-2S does not seem to appear at address X*  
The driver could not find the ISI residing at the address X. Make sure there is no  
other device in your system at the same I/O address and that the ISI is seated  
properly in the system slot.  
2. *Error: ISIHI-2S rejected the load header*  
*Error: ISIHI-2S got out of sync*  
*Error: ISIHI-2S verify failed at address X*  
*Error: Expected X received Y*  
*Error: Verify got out of sync*  
All the above errors represent problems with the file server not being able to  
communicate with the ISIHI-2S. Make sure no other device is residing in the system  
at the same I/O address you chose for the ISIHI-2S. Power down the server and  
make sure the ISIHI-2S is seated properly in the system slot. Power up the file server  
and try to load the AIO driver again. If the problem persists, contact the Multi-Tech  
Technical Support team.  
52  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Troubleshooting  
Problem: I loaded the driver at the file server console, then I started NetWare Connect  
and connected a modem to a port on an ISIHI-2S. When I try to communicate with the  
modem, I see the DTR of the modem being raised, but the modem does not respond to  
my AT commands.  
Solution: There might be an IRQ conflict between an ISIHI-2S and some other hardware  
in your system. Even though that particular device (for example, a mouse) is not  
activated under NetWare, that device will still control the IRQ. Refer to your system’s  
documentation to find out how to disable that device.  
Configuring Ports for NetWare Connect  
To set up NetWare Connect ports, enter LOAD NWCCON at the NetWare console  
prompt. LOAD NWCCON opens the NetWare Connect Configuration Utility. Select the  
appropriate menu options (modem type, speed, flow control, etc.)  
Removing the Driver (Novell)  
In Novell, remove file AIOISIX.NLM from the system directory and make the appropriate  
changes to the Autoexec.ncf file.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
SCO Open Server 5 Driver Installation  
The installation utility provided by SCO is called custom. This section provides a brief  
guide for opening the utility and installing the driver. The instructions below should be  
used only on SCO Open Server 5 systems. When you have completed the steps below,  
go to Multi-Tech Installation Script, which immediately follows this section.  
1. If installing the driver from your default floppy drive, type custom and press ENTER to  
open the custom utility. If using a nondefault drive, you must inform your system of  
the disk drive from where you are doing the installation and the size and capacity of  
the diskette(s).  
2. Select Software and press ENTER.  
3. The main menu displays a list of options. Press ENTER to select the highlighted item  
(default): Install.  
4. Select From comsco and press ENTER.  
5. Make sure the driver diskette is in the floppy diskette drive and then press ENTER to  
select the highlighted item (default): Floppy Disk Drive 0. The following message  
appears: Examining media. Please wait …  
6. The system recognizes you are installing the Multi-Tech Serial Card Driver and  
prompts you to select the type of installation.  
7. Select Full Installation and press ENTER to continue. These messages appear:  
Extracting Files...  
Executing Multi-Tech Serial Card Driver Init Script...  
8. When installation finishes, this prompt appears:  
Do you wish to continue ( y / n / q ):?  
Type Y, press ENTER, and proceed with the next section, Multi-Tech Installation  
Script.  
54  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
The Multi-Tech Installation Script  
This section guides you through the Multi-Tech Installation Script for SCO and UNIXWare  
systems. The script requests information such as how many boards you want to install,  
what I/O address and IRQ values (interrupt requests) you have selected, and how many  
pseudo devices you want to create for Multi_View utility. This information extracts the  
necessary drivers, which will be linked with your system’s kernel.  
1. The first screen requests the number of ISIHI-2S cards you are installing. If you have  
more than one ISIHI-2S, use the chart on page 18 of this guide—Recommended  
Base I/O Address and IRQ Values—to enter the appropriate values for each card.  
Enter the number of cards and press ENTER.  
2. The second screen requests the number of ports. Enter 8 and press ENTER.  
3. The third screen requests the base I/O address you selected for the first card you are  
installing. It is important to verify that the address you select for each ISI does not  
overlap with existing devices or with another ISI. The ISI card uses the base I/O  
address and the next fifteen addresses.  
Note: If the I/O address you select conflicts with an existing device in your system,  
you must remove the ISI driver and re-install it.  
Enter the base I/O address and press ENTER. For additional information, refer to the  
online manual.  
4. The fourth screen requests the IRQ value for this card. Verify that the IRQ you select  
for each ISI does not overlap with existing devices or with another ISI. Type the  
desired IRQ value and press ENTER.  
Note: If you entered a number greater than 1 at the first screen, the previous three  
screens reappear in sequence for each card you install. After you enter the  
necessary information, installation continues.  
5. The fifth screen requests you enter the number of pseudo devices to create for  
Multi_View Utility. Enter the value and press ENTER.  
Note: You must enter a minimum of 8 for each board installed.  
6. The /dev directory holds device-information files used by the kernel to access the  
hardware. When you add an ISI card, you must give the ISI ports unique names, so  
they do not conflict with existing ports or other devices known to your system. If you  
use an existing device name to identify your new ISI ports, the existing device is  
deleted when the ISI port using its name is created.  
The default base name for ISIHI-2S ports is ttyl. The default base name for printer  
ports is prnl. If this is acceptable, type Y and press ENTER.  
To change the base name, type N and provide a prefix of less than five characters.  
The base name you select will be used for all ports on each card you install.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
The following describes the format used in naming ISI ports:  
Default device name and format: ttyl  
ttyl basename  
This prefix is applied to all ISI ports on all boards. Base names contain 1–4  
characters.  
b
board number  
Values of 1 through 4, depending on the number of ISIs installed.  
port letter  
x
Values of A–H for ISI ports. (SCO UNIX values A-H indicate modem ports.)  
Device base name selected: _________________  
7. After you select a device base name, you are prompted for a printer base name. This  
prefix identifies each port that supports a terminal with a printer attached to its  
auxiliary port (for transparent printing). Select a unique base name or accept the  
default of prnl (printer parameters are outlined in the Multi_Setup Utility section in  
this guide).  
Printer base name selected: _________________  
8. The Multi_View utility initializes the multiple-page capability of terminals with multiple  
pages of memory. You are asked how many pseudo devices (the total number of  
pseudo devices you want to make available to the Multi_View utility) to create. This is  
the total number of devices available to all Multi-Tech’s terminals. You can have a  
maximum of 256 pseudo devices in your system.  
9. The confirmation screen lists the values you selected. If these values are correct,  
type Y and the installation process continues.  
If there is an error in any of the values displayed, type N and the first screen appears.  
You must then re-enter the information for each card.  
When you accept the confirmation list (by typing Y), a series of messages displays  
while the driver is being installed and the kernel rebuilt. When the display finishes,  
press ENTER to continue. When Installation complete displays, press ENTER .  
10. Select Host and press ENTER. Remove the diskette from floppy drive.  
11. Select Exit and press ENTER.  
12. To reboot the system, enter the following commands:  
Type sync and press ENTER.  
Type sync again and press ENTER.  
Type haltsys and press ENTER.  
Driver installation for the ISI card now is complete.  
56  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Activating Ports in SCO Open Server 5  
SCO Open Server 5 provides a device database that monitors the activity of serial ports  
through which users can log onto the host. If your ISI ports are used by terminals (e.g.,  
to allow users to log onto your host), you must create an entry in the system’s device  
database that furnishes specific information for the terminals that will be used on each ISI  
port. The database is referenced each time a user attempts to log in. If there is no  
database entry for a particular terminal, access to the host is denied.  
1. Turn on your system, noting that the firmware for each ISIHI-2S loads successfully. If  
the firmware for a given ISIHI card does not load, none of its ports will be accessible.  
(If this happens, see Multi-Tech’s Administrative Utility section.)  
2. The device database can be modified in two ways:  
To create terminal accounts with default settings, type /tcb/bin/ttys_update.  
To customize terminal entries, you must create them individually by entering the  
system administrator’s shell (you must be logged in as the root user). To enter the  
administrator’s shell, type sysadmsh and press ENTER.  
3. Create device entries for each port of the ISI card by selecting the following from the  
database menu: Accounts, Terminal, Create.  
4. Enter the complete name of the first device you want to create, substituting the base  
name, board number, and port letter for the parameters: ttylb. Use a lower case x  
value for local DTE (terminal) support and an upper case X value for modem control  
for each port you want to enable. The port status can be altered later, but one setting  
must be selected at this time.  
5. Repeat this process for each port on each board you have installed. Record the  
setting you select for each port.  
6. Using device names created in the previous section, type the following command for  
each port you want to activate: enable ttylbx  
7. Repeat this command for each port you want to activate, using the lower case letter  
for local terminal use or upper case for modem control.  
Note: Only one of the options (e.g., modem control or local terminal access) should  
be enabled for any port at one time. For example, you cannot enable ttyl1a and then  
enable ttyl1A. To change the status of a port, disable the current status (disable  
ttyl1a) and then enable it for the desired status (enable ttyl1A).  
Removing the Driver (SCO Open Server 5)  
To remove the Multi-Tech Serial Card Driver, you should enter the configuration utility  
(e.g., custom for SCO Open Server 5) and follow the instructions to remove the entire  
driver and rebuild the kernel without the ISI driver. If it is necessary to re-install the driver  
due to I/O address or IRQ overlap, remove the driver first.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Multi_Setup Utility  
This section guides you through the Multi_View Utility for SCO and UNIXWare systems.  
While installing the ISIHI-2S drivers, you also install the Multi_View utility for multiple  
page terminals. This section profiles the Multi_View utility and gives you the necessary  
information to create a Multi_View information file.  
Once installed, Multi_View can be opened by typing the following command:  
Multi_View [options]  
Multi_View initializes the multiple page capacity of terminals with multiple pages of  
memory. While Multi_View works even on a dumb terminal (without multiple pages of  
memory), your terminal should have multiple pages of memory and be capable of  
retaining the position of the cursor on each page to get the proper effect.  
Most state-of-the-art terminals have multiple pages of memory that allow them to switch  
between sessions. Each page of memory available on the terminal allows it’s user to  
establish another session on the host. The multiscreen capability of the terminal stores  
screen information and cursor position for each session to a different page of memory.  
Multi_View allows the host to process the session-switching hot keys and issue the  
necessary escape sequence to the terminal so the appropriate page displays. Multi_View  
treats each new screen opened by the user as a virtual screen and maintains mapping  
between each virtual screen created and a page of memory on the terminal. The number  
of virtual screens and pages of memory available are dependent on the terminal  
emulation, the particular terminal being used, and the number of pseudo devices created  
by the system administrator during installation.  
In an ideal case, there can be as many virtual screens as there are pages of memory on  
the terminal. If more virtual screens are specified than there are pages of memory, two  
virtual screens can be mapped to a single page of memory where both sessions’s  
screens display when that page of memory is recalled.  
Once Multi_View successfully reads the terminal description and initializes the terminal,  
the hot key sequence for help displays. The following hot keys are defined:  
• Go to nth virtual screen  
• Create new virtual screen  
• Switch between current and previous screens  
• Provide help on hot keys  
• Quit Multi_View with an exit status of zero  
• End Multi_View with a non-zero exit status  
To define your own terminal capability database, refer to the Description File Format  
below. The following options are defined:  
-h Prints the Help file. Multi_View uses the environment variable MTDSPLY to  
choose the utility to display this file. If no such variable is found in the  
environment, then Multi_View uses the pg utility.  
-t Informs Multi_View to use a terminal description different from the one specified  
by the TERM variable in the user environment.  
-f Allows user to instruct Multi_View to read the terminal description from a different  
file than the default description file. The default description file is usr/bin/msfile.  
58  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Description File Format  
A description file may contain descriptions for multiple terminal types. Separate each  
terminal entry by a blank line. The first line for each terminal contains the various names  
by which that terminal is known. The three types of entries for each terminal emulation  
are hot key entries, terminal escape sequences, and timing specifications.  
Hot Key Entries  
These entries have three columns. The first column specifies a mnemonic, which is  
associated with a specific action taken by Multi_View. The mnemonics are listed below:  
Mnemonic Description  
vs  
Identifies the virtual screen entry. An entry is present for each virtual screen  
that needs to be opened by Multi_View  
sw  
cm  
Identifies the hot key sequence for switching between two virtual screens  
Identifies the hot key sequence that instructs Multi_View to create a new  
virtual screen  
lm  
Identifies the hot key sequence for displaying help on the hot keys  
Identifies the hot key sequence to exit Multi_View with a zero exit status  
Identifies the hot key sequence to exit Multi_View with a non-zero exit status  
qm  
em  
The second column contains the keystroke sequence to press to make the action  
described by the mnemonic in the first column to take place.  
The third column specifies the escape sequence sent by the terminal to Multi_View  
when the key combination specified in column two is pressed.  
In other words, these entries tell Multi_View that the terminal sends the escape sequence  
specified in column three to Multi_View when the keystrokes specified in column two are  
pressed and that Multi_View should take the action specified in column one whenever it  
receives the characters specified in column three.  
Terminal Escape Sequences  
The terminal escape sequence entries describe the escape sequence to be sent to the  
terminal. The first column contains a mnemonic, which are described below:  
Mnemonic  
ps  
Description  
Describes the escape sequence to send to the terminal to switch to the  
appropriate physical page. The physical pages are numbered in the order  
they are specified in the description file.  
clear  
Specifies the escape sequence to clear the screen.  
The second column has the character sequence to be sent to the terminal by Multi_View.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
Timing Specification  
The timing specification is the interval in tenths of a second that the utility waits before  
checking for an escape sequence. The timing specification is defined below:  
Mnemonic  
time  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in units of 0.1 seconds, Multi_View waits while  
reading characters before checking for escape sequences.  
A sample file for the Wyse50 terminal is as follows:  
wy50 wyse50 w50  
; line 1  
; line 2  
; line 3  
; line 4  
; line 5  
; line 6  
; line 7  
; line 8  
; line 9  
; line 10  
; line 11  
vs  
Shift_F1  
Shift_F2  
Shift_F3  
Shift_F4  
Shift_F5  
Shift_F6  
Shift_F7  
\001' \015  
\001a\015  
\001b\015  
\001c\015  
\001d\015  
\001e\015  
\001f\015  
\033w0  
vs  
sw  
cm  
cm  
lm  
qm  
ps  
ps  
\033w1  
clear  
\033+  
time  
1
; line 12  
Line 1  
Line 2  
Gives all the different names that the Wyse50 terminal is known.  
Specifies the virtual screen 0 settings. When the help screen displays,  
<Shift>+<F1> displays for the virtual screen 0. The entry means the terminal  
is going to send a string with the first ASCII character being the start of  
header (01 Hex), second character a hyphen (-), and the last character a  
carriage return <cr> when <Shift>+<F1> is entered on the terminal and  
Multi_View is switched to the shell/process associated with virtual screen 0.  
Line 3  
Specifies the entry for virtual screen 1.  
Line 4-8 Describes the hot keys to switch between the current and previous virtual  
screens, create a new virtual screen, display the hot key help, quit Multi_View  
with a zero exit status, and end Multi_View with a non-zero status  
respectively.  
Lines 9,10 Describes the physical pages on the terminal. The second string on each line  
gives the escape sequence to be sent to the terminal to switch to the  
appropriate physical page.  
Line 11  
Line 12  
Clear string to clear the screen.  
Specifies at least a 0.1 second wait in reading data before going ahead and  
check for hot keys.  
Each character in the escape sequence or hot key can be specified as an ASCII  
character if it is printable. If not printable, it should be specified in an octal format with  
leading 0s and preceded by a \. For example, an ASCII escape character can be  
specified as \033.  
Do not switch the screen while outputting as it may break the escape sequence sent to  
the terminal. When there is more than one virtual screen, all outputs from the inactive  
virtual screens are blocked. The virtual screen the user currently is working on is the only  
active screen.  
60  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
The fullest potential of Multi_View is realized on a multiscreen terminal. However,  
Multi_View can be used on a dumb terminal that has only a single page of memory.  
When there is only one page, the screen output is unavoidably garbled from different  
virtual screen outputs.  
Some important ASCII unprintable characters and their octal values are listed below.  
SOH (^a)  
ETX (^c)  
ENQ (^e)  
ESC (^[)  
Carriage  
\001  
\003  
\005  
\033  
STX (^b)  
\002  
\004  
\006  
\012  
EOT (^d)  
ACK (^f)  
Newline (NL)  
Return (CR) \015  
Known limitations include:  
• No null characters are allowed in the hot keys.  
• No hot key can be a complete substring of another hot key.  
Administration Utility  
Multi-Tech also provides an administrative utility called Multi_Admin, which aids in  
troubleshooting Multi-Tech’s multiport boards. This section guides you through the  
Administration Utility for SCO and UNIXWare systems. This interactive menu utility  
displays various types of Multi-Tech’s multiport boards that can be installed in your  
system. You specifically can observe the status and statistics of any installed multiport  
board or any of its ports (e.g., MultiClusterU, ISI608, or ISIHI-2S).  
This utility periodically updates the statistics and status information for selected boards  
and/or ports. The displayed statistics are self-explanatory.  
The -v option provides detailed information and can be used to analyze problems when  
calling Multi-Tech’s technical support:  
Usage:  
Multi_Admin [ -v ]  
While you can view statistics and status on-screen, you also can store them to a log file  
and fax the log to a technical support member at Multi-Tech to troubleshoot.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3—Software/Driver Installation  
62  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODEM  
4
AT Commands, S-Registers,  
and Result Codes  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Modem AT Commands  
The ISIHI-2S’s modems are controlled by instructions called AT commands, so called  
because the attention characters, AT, precede each command or sequence of  
commands (known as a command string). You can send commands to the modem from  
your keyboard while in terminal mode, or you can use communications software to issue  
these commands automatically.  
The modem is in command mode when it is not dialing or online. When it is in command  
mode, you have access to a complete communications system that allows you to use  
several features, including the basic AT command set described in this chapter. Using the  
basic AT command set, you can enter phone numbers for automatic dialing, configure  
modem options, and monitor telephone activity. In addition, you can command your  
modem to perform advanced features such as error correction, data compression, speed  
conversion, and more.  
This chapter describes the modem’s operational modes, and shows you how to use each  
of the modem’s AT commands. These commands and responses are compatible with all  
systems and with all data communications software using the AT command set.  
Modes of Operation  
The modem operates in two basic functional modes: command mode and online mode.  
(There is also an in-between state, wait-for-carrier, in which the modem is out of  
command mode but not yet online.) When you turn on the modem, it is in command  
mode and is ready to accept and respond to commands from your keyboard or software.  
The modem enters online mode after it dials, connects with another modem, and detects  
a valid carrier signal. If it does not detect a carrier signal within the time frame controlled  
in the modems by the S-register S7, the modem abandons the call and re-enters  
command mode.  
You can make the modem enter online mode without dialing by entering AT and then D  
(dial) or A (force answer mode). The modem exits online mode if the carrier signal is lost  
or intentionally dropped. When this happens, the modem hangs up and re-enters  
command mode. By sending certain escape characters to the modem while online, you  
can make it enter command mode without losing the carrier signal.  
Command Structure  
You can control a wide variety of modem operations and options when the modem is in  
command mode. AT commands tell the modem to dial a number, to answer a call, to  
operate at a certain speed, to use a certain compression technique, and many other  
functions. AT commands consist of one or two letters, which may be preceded by an  
ampersand (&), a percent character (%), or a slash character (\). The Q command, for  
example, determines whether the modem returns result codes, while the &Q command  
selects the asynchronous communications mode.  
A parameter after a command (0, 1, 2, etc.) tells the modem which option to use. If you  
do not specify a parameter, the modem assumes the 0 (zero) option. E, for example, is  
the same as E0. You can issue several commands on a single line (a command string)  
as long as the line does not exceed 40 characters.  
64  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Note: Each character in a command counts toward the 40 character command line  
maximum. Example: Q1 is a single command, but it counts as two characters in the  
command line.  
Each command has a valid range of parameters; for example, &S can have only 0 or 1  
as a parameter. Valid commands always generate an OK result code, and a few  
generate an additional response such as a list of parameters. An invalid command such  
as &S3, which has a parameter outside the valid range, generates an ERROR result  
code. Most commands have a default parameter that is enabled when the modem is  
turned on or reset with the ATZ or AT&F command. Factory defaults are stored in read-  
only memory (ROM) and cannot be changed. User-defined defaults can be stored in  
nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) and can be changed or deleted at will.  
Command Editing  
Always begin a command with the letters AT. Enter the entire command string in upper or  
lower case, but do not mix cases within the command string. The AT command is not  
executed until you press ENTER. Use the BACKSPACE key to erase the previous  
command character. It will not erase the AT characters once they are typed. If your  
keyboard has no BACKSPACE key, use CTRL+H. (You can change the character  
recognized by the modem as BACKSPACE to any other ASCII character by changing  
register S5.)  
Press CTRL+X to cancel an entire command that has been typed but not yet executed.  
This also clears the command buffer. The effect is the same as backspacing the  
command, only quicker.  
The modem stores characters entered in a command in its command buffer until they are  
executed by pressing ENTER. The command buffer’s capacity is 40 characters. The  
attention characters (AT) do not count toward the 40-character command line maximum.  
You may use spaces for increased readability when typing a command. Spaces are not  
stored in the command buffer, and they do not count towards the 40-character command  
line maximum. Special characters, such as hyphens and parentheses, are not allowed.  
If you exceed the 40-character limit or type invalid characters, the command buffer is  
automatically erased and an ERROR message displays. You should retype the command  
within the 40-character limit, using only the allowed characters.  
The commands in this chapter are organized by function. Abbreviated commands are  
listed below by function along with a short description and page numbers that refer to a  
more detailed description, immediately following this list.  
Topic  
Command  
Description  
Page  
Dialing Action  
D
H
L
P
T
V
W
,
Dial  
67  
On-hook/off-hook  
Redial last number  
Pulse dialing  
Dial Modifiers  
67  
Tone dialing  
Speakerphone mode  
Wait for new dial tone  
Dialing pause  
;
Return to command mode after dialing  
Flash on-hook  
!
$
Detect call card tone  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Topic  
Command  
Description  
Page  
@
^
Quiet answer  
Disable data calling tone transmission  
Store a phone number  
Phone Number Memory  
&Z  
DS  
&W  
&F  
Z
70  
71  
Dial a stored number  
Configuration Storage & Recall  
Store configuration  
Load factory default configuration  
Reset modem  
&Y  
E
Select stored configuration on power-up  
Echo command mode characters  
Result codes: enable/disable  
Result codes: verbose/terse  
Protocol result code  
Modem Responses (Result Codes)  
72  
Q
V
\V  
X
Result codes and call progress  
&Q  
%B  
B
Select asynchronous communications mode  
View numbers in blacklist  
Answer tone  
Online Connection  
74  
C
Carrier control  
F
Echo online data characters  
Guard tones  
&G  
-C  
N
Data calling tone  
Modulation handshake  
Disable inactivity timer  
Long space disconnect  
Carrier Detect control  
Data Terminal Ready control  
Data Set Ready control  
Non-error correction mode  
Auto-reliable mode  
\T  
Y
RS-232 Interface Controls  
&C  
&D  
&S  
76  
77  
Error Correction & Data Compression \N0 or &Q6  
\N3  
\N2  
Reliable mode  
%C0  
%C1  
Data compression disabled  
Data compression enabled  
Repeat last command  
Information request  
Immediate Action  
Flow Control  
A/  
78  
79  
I
&B  
V.32 auto retrain  
&V  
View current configuration  
Asynchronous mode  
&M0  
&K0 or \Q0  
Flow control disabled  
Hardware flow control  
XON/XOFF flow control  
XON/XOFF no pass-through  
Auxiliary relay control  
Enable data buffer control  
Modem port flow control  
Set break control  
&K3 or \Q3  
&K4 or \Q1  
\X0  
&J  
\J  
\G  
\K  
+ES=6  
Enable synchronous buffered mode  
Default in-band escape sequence  
Force answer mode  
Escape Sequences  
+++AT<CR>  
81  
A
O
Go back online  
Diagnostics Speaker Settings  
&T  
L
Self-test commands  
82  
82  
Monitor speaker volume  
Monitor speaker mode  
M
66  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Dialing Commands  
Use dialing commands to dial and hang up.  
Ds  
Dial  
s = phone number  
Default: none  
The letter D in a command causes the modem to dial the telephone number immediately  
following it. For example, if you type ATD5551212<cr>, the modem dials the number  
555-1212.  
The ISIHI-2S modem supports several dialing methods. With the D command, you can  
specify either pulse (ATDP) or tone (ATDT) dialing. You also can modify the dialing  
command with several other characters that are explained in the Dial Modifier  
Commands section, later in this chapter.  
The modem also lets you select either smart (wait-for-dial-tone) dialing or blind dialing.  
With smart dialing, the modem waits for and detects dial tones and busy signals. With  
blind dialing, the modem works with timed pauses (determined by the value of register  
S6), not dial tone and busy signal detection. See the X command for more information on  
blind and smart dialing.  
Hn  
On-Hook/Off-Hook  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: 0  
Use the H command to make the modem hang up (go on-hook) or simulate the action of  
picking up a telephone handset (go off-hook).  
H0 (or H) hangs up the modem  
H1 brings the line off-hook, just as if you had picked up the telephone handset.  
It is not necessary to use the H1 command to bring the line off-hook when using the D  
command. The modem automatically goes off-hook when you press ENTER at the end of  
the dial command.  
Dial Modifier Commands  
The dial string can include the digits 0 through 9, the pound sign (#), the asterisk (*), and  
the letters A, B, C, or D. The latter are used by some PBXs; the exact function will  
depend on the PBX manufacturer’s feature set and implementation. There are also  
several command characters, called “dial modifiers,” that can be included within a dialing  
command after the letter D. Their functions include pulse or tone dialing, pauses in the  
dial sequence, automatic redials if a number is busy, and reverting to command mode or  
switching to answer mode after dialing.  
L
Redial Last Number  
Default: none  
You can redial the last number dialed by entering L immediately following the dial  
command (ATD). This command is handy if you encounter a busy signal and want to try  
the call again.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
P, T  
Pulse or Tone Dialing  
Default: T  
The ISIHI-2S’s modems dials numbers by using pulse dialing, tone dialing, or a  
combination of both methods. Pulse dialing, used by rotary-dial telephones, uses the  
timed opening and closing of a relay to encode the numbers. Tone dialing, used by push-  
button (touch-tone) telephones, uses dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing.  
P selects pulse dialing.  
T selects tone dialing.  
Insert P or T in the dialing command just before the digits you want to pulse- or tone-dial.  
If neither pulse nor tone dialing is specified in the dial command, the modem uses  
whatever method was used last.  
Note: When your modem is first turned on or reset, it uses the tone dialing method  
(which is the default), even if you do not include T in your dial command.  
Examples:  
To pulse-dial the number 555-1212, type ATDP5551212 and press ENTER.  
To tone-dial the same number, type ATDT5551212 and press ENTER.  
To call out of a PBX (switchboard) system where a 9 has to be pulse-dialed, and the rest  
of the number has to be tone-dialed after pausing for a second dial tone, type  
ATDP9,T5551212 and press ENTER. (The comma causes a pause.)  
V
Switch to Speakerphone Mode  
Inserting V into the dialing command causes the modem to switch to speakerphone  
mode and dial the following number. Use ATH to hang up.  
W
Wait for New Dial Tone  
Inserting W into the dialing command causes the modem to wait for another dial tone  
before it resumes dialing. (It is not necessary to enter W at the beginning of the dialing  
command.)  
Note: Because the modem must be able to detect the dial tone for this command to  
work, you also must select wait-for-dial-tone dialing with the X2 or X4 command.  
,
Dialing Pause  
Enter a comma in the dialing string to make the modem pause while dialing. This pause  
lasts two seconds (North American models) or four seconds (U.K. and International  
models) for each comma entered. You can force longer pauses by entering multiple  
commas, or you can change the length of the pause caused by a comma by setting  
register S8 to any value from 0 through 255 seconds (North American), 4 through 7  
seconds (U.K.) or 4 through 255 seconds (International).  
Note: Each comma in a dialing command counts as one of the 40 allowed characters.  
68  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
;
Return to Command Mode After Dialing  
Enter a semicolon (;) as the last character of a dialing command to cause the modem to  
return to command mode immediately after executing the command instead of waiting for  
a carrier signal and going online.  
For example, type ATDT5551212; to tone-dial the number and immediately go back into  
command mode. The semicolon is useful when modem data transfer is not desired, as in  
voice communications, or in applications using touch tones as a data entry method, such  
as bank-by-phone.  
!
Flash On-Hook  
Some switchboard systems react to a momentary on-hook condition. Insert an  
exclamation mark into the dialing command to cause the modem to “flash” on-hook for  
half a second, just as if you had pressed the switch hook on a telephone set for half a  
second. (With U.K. models, the exclamation mark causes the modem to flash on-hook for  
90 milliseconds.)  
For example, to flash on-hook to transfer to extension 5678 after dialing the number 555-  
1234, type ATDT5551234,,!5678. The commas cause a 4-second pause.  
$
Detect Call Card Tone  
Use the $ command to dial services that require you to enter your call card number after  
a tone. The $ character in the dialing string causes the modem to pause and wait for an  
AT&T call card bong or a 1600 Hz tone. When the modem detects the tone, it processes  
the rest of the dialing string. If it does not detect the tone within the time set in register  
S7, the modem stops processing the dial string with a NO CARRIER message. Pressing  
any key also terminates the $ command.  
@
Quiet Answer  
Use the @ command to access a system that does not provide a dial tone. The @  
command causes the modem to wait before processing the next character in the dialing  
string. The wait is for one or more rings back followed by five seconds of silence.  
For example, ATDT5551212@6313550 causes the modem to dial the first number (555-  
1212), then wait for the time specified in register S7 for at least one ringback and five  
seconds of silence. If the modem detects a busy signal, it hangs up and generates a  
BUSY result code. If it does not detect five seconds of silence, it hangs up and generates  
a NO ANSWER result code. If it does detect five seconds of silence, it dials the second  
number (631-3550).  
^
Disable Data Calling Tone Transmission  
Use the ^ command to disable the transmission of data calling tones. In the following  
example, the ^ command is used to tone dial 555-1212 and suppress data calling tone  
transmission. ATDT^5551212  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Phone Number Memory Commands  
The modem can store up to four telephone numbers in nonvolatile memory. You can  
store the numbers with the &Z command and dial them with the ATDS command.  
&Zn=s Store a Phone Number  
s = phone number n= 0, 1, 2 or 3  
Default: none  
You can store a telephone number string in the modem’s phone number memory. You  
can store four of these strings using the &Zn=s command. The memory locations are  
labeled N0 through N3.  
For example, the telephone number 1-612-555-1212 is stored at memory location N2 by  
typing &Z2=16125551212 and pressing ENTER.  
DSn Dial a Stored Number  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: none  
You can automatically dial a telephone number that is stored in the modem’s number  
memory by typing ATDSn, where n = 0 through 3. For example, you can dial a number  
stored at N2 by typing ATDS2 in terminal mode and pressing ENTER.  
70  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Configuration Storage and Recall Commands  
The ISIHI-2S stores parameters in two places. It stores factory default parameters in  
read-only memory (ROM), and customized parameters in nonvolatile random access  
memory (NVRAM). You cannot change the default parameters in ROM, but you can  
change parameters in temporary memory and then store them in NVRAM as custom  
settings. You can then recall the custom settings as if they were factory default settings.  
&Wn Store Configuration  
n = 0  
Default: &W0  
The &W command stores current AT commands and S-register values in nonvolatile  
memory, so you won’t lose your custom settings when you turn off the modem or reset it.  
&W0 (or &W) stores all current AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random  
access memory (NVRAM) and configures the modem so that it reads your custom  
settings in NVRAM when the modem is turned on or when it is reset with the Z command.  
The &F reset command will continue to read the factory default settings in ROM.  
&Fn Load Default Configuration  
n = 0  
Default: &F0  
ISIHI-2S modems store factory default AT command settings and S-register values in  
read-only memory (ROM); they store your custom AT command and S-register values in  
nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM).  
The &F0 (or &F) command resets modem to the factory default values stored in ROM.  
Zn  
Reset Modem  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: none  
The Z command resets the modem to the configuration last saved by the &W command.  
The default values come from the customized configuration in NVRAM.  
Z1 is the same as Z0, and functions identically.  
&Yn Select Stored Configuration for Hard Reset  
n = 0  
Default: 0  
This command is included for compatibility with applications that issue the &Y0  
command. Modem functions are not changed.  
&Y0 selects the profile stored at location 0 on power-up.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Modem Response (Result Code) Commands  
ISIHI-2S modems can give responses to commands. The most common is OK, but the  
modems also can alert you or your software to dial tones, busy signals, connection  
speeds, and whether the connection is made with error correction or compression  
enabled. These responses are called result codes; they can be terse (numbers) or  
verbose (text).  
En  
Echo Command Mode Characters  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: E1  
Normally, when you type commands on the keyboard, the modem echoes the characters  
back to the computer or terminal, which displays them on the monitor. Use the E  
command to turn this feature off and on.  
E0 disables the echo.  
E1 enables the echo.  
Qn  
Result Codes Enable/Disable  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: Q0  
Use the Q command to enable or disable result codes for applications such as computer-  
controlled auto dialing.  
Q0 (or Q) enables result codes.  
Q1 disables result codes for applications such as computer-controlled auto-dialing.  
Vn  
Result Codes (Verbose/Terse)  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: V1  
The V command controls whether the modem’s result codes display as text (verbose) or  
numeric (terse) messages. For example, if no carrier signal is detected after dialing, the  
result can display either as NO CARRIER or as the number 3.  
V0 (or V) displays the modem’s result codes as a number.  
V1 displays result codes as text.  
Xn  
Result Codes and Call Progress Selection  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7  
Default: X4  
The X command selects which result codes the modem provides in command mode and  
determines whether the modem uses smart dialing or blind dialing. When it smart dials,  
the modem listens for dial tones and busy signals and responds to them. When it blind  
dials, the modem ignores the signals and relies on timing instead.  
X0 causes the modem to blind dial. Instead of looking for a dial tone, it pauses for the  
time set in register S6 and then dials regardless. Once a connection is made, it sends the  
Bell 103 basic code CONNECT to the terminal. It ignores any busy signals.  
72  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
X1 causes the modem to blind dial, but in addition to the basic CONNECT code, it  
provides extended codes consisting of the word CONNECT and the speed of the  
connection (CONNECT 14400 or CONNECT 28800, for example). In this mode, the  
modem does not recognize or respond to dial tones or busy signals.  
X2 causes the modem to wait for a dial tone before dialing. If it does not detect a dial  
tone within the time set by S6, the modem sends a NO DIALTONE result code to the  
terminal. In this mode, the modem provides extended result codes but does not respond  
to busy signals.  
X3 causes the modem to blind dial, but also it looks for a busy signal, and if it detects  
one, it sends a BUSY result code to the terminal. In this mode, the modem provides  
extended result codes, but it does not respond to dial tones.  
X4 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal, and respond with NO  
DIALTONE or BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most  
useful setting for most data communication programs and is the default setting.  
X5 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal, and response with NO  
DIALTONE or BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most  
useful setting for most data communication programs and is the default setting.  
X6 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal, and respond with NO  
DIALTONE or BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most  
useful setting for most data communication programs and is the default setting.  
X7 causes the modem to wait for a dial tone before dialing. If it does not detect a dial  
tone within the time set by S6, the modem sends only the basic result code to the  
terminal (ERROR, NO CARRIER, or CONNECT, for example). In this mode, the modem  
does not respond to busy signals.  
&Qn Asynchronous Communications Mode  
n = 0, 5, or 6  
Default: &Q5  
The &Qn command allows you to select the type of asynchronous communications mode  
for your modem.  
Note: These commands are the same as several of the \Nn commands, described later  
in this chapter.  
&Q0 selects asynchronous mode with data buffering. This is the same as \N0, non-error  
correction mode with data buffering.  
&Q5 selects error control with data buffering. This is the same as \N3, V.42/MNP auto-  
reliable mode.  
&Q6 selects asynchronous mode with data buffering. This is the same as \N0, non-error  
correction mode with data buffering.  
%B  
View Numbers in Blacklist  
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the last call  
attempted in the previous two hours failed. In countries that do not require blacklisting,  
the ERROR result code appears.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Online Connection Commands  
The following commands control the conditions of the online connection.  
Bn  
Answer Tone  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 15, or 16  
Default: B1 and B16  
The B command selects the frequency the modem uses for its answer tone. (The answer  
tone is the tone transmitted by the receiving modem to the calling modem, thus initiating  
the handshake between the two modems.) At higher speeds (2400 bps and above) there  
is no conflict, because all protocols use the Bell frequency of 2225 Hz. Lower speeds  
require different frequencies.  
B0 selects ITU-T V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.  
B1 selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps. This is a default.  
B2 deselects the V.23 reverse channel.  
B3 is identical to B2 in function. It also deselects the V.23 reverse channel.  
B15 selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.  
B16 selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps. This is a default.  
Cn  
Carrier Control  
n = 1  
Default: C1  
The Cn command provides backward compatibility with some data communications  
software.  
C1 enables normal transmit carrier switching.  
-Cn  
Data Calling Tone  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: -C0  
The data calling tone is a tone of a certain frequency and cadence, as specified in the  
V.25 standards, which identifies whether it is remote data, fax, or voice. The frequency is  
1300 Hz, with a cadence of .5 s on and 2 s off.  
-C0 disables the V.25 data calling tone.  
-C1 enables the V.25 data calling tone.  
F
Echo Online Data Characters  
n = 1  
Default: F1  
This command determines if the modem echoes data from the DTE. This command  
provides backward compatibility with some data communications software.  
F1 disables online data character echo.  
74  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
&Gn Guard Tones  
n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: &G0 (models outside U.K.) or &G2 (U.K. models only)  
The &G command controls the presence or absence of guard tones from the transmitter  
when in answer mode at either 1200 or 2400 bps. Guard tones are used in Europe and  
other areas to allow the modem to function in the telephone systems. Guard tones are  
not used in the United States. U.K. models are locked at &G2 (1800 Hz guard tone).  
&G0 disables ITU-T guard tones.  
&G1 enables ITU-T 550 Hz guard tone.  
&G2 enables ITU-T 1800 Hz guard tone.  
Nn  
Modulation Handshake  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: N1  
This command controls whether the local modem performs a negotiated handshake with  
the remote modem at connection time, when the communication speed of the two  
modems is different.  
N0 enables handshaking only at the communication standard specified by S37 and the  
ATB command.  
N1 always begins the handshake only at the communication standard specified by S37  
and the ATB command, but allows fallback to a lower speed as the handshake proceeds.  
This is the default.  
\Tn  
Yn  
Inactivity Timer  
n = 0  
Default: \T0  
The inactivity timer specifies the length of time, in minutes, that the modem waits before  
disconnecting when no data is sent or received. This timer is specified in register S3. The  
\T0 command disables the inactivity timer.  
Long Space Disconnect  
n = 0  
Default: Y0  
When two modems are connected in reliable mode, a link disconnect request packet is  
sent to request a disconnect. In non-error correction mode, there is no polite way to  
request a disconnect. As a result, some garbage may be received when a hang-up  
command is issued.  
Y0 disables the modem’s use of the break signal.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
RS-232 Interface Commands  
These commands define how an ISIHI-2S modem uses and responds to standard RS-  
232 signals.  
&Cn Carrier Detect Control  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: &C1  
The &C command lets you control the Carrier Detect (CD) signal on the RS-232/V.24  
interface. This is a signal from the modem to your computer indicating that the carrier  
signal is being received from a remote modem. Normally, CD goes high (turns on) when  
the modem detects a carrier on the communications link and drops (turns off) when it  
loses the carrier. By using &C, you can force the signal to stay high, or to drop  
momentarily when the remote modem disconnects. This option is useful with some CBX  
phone systems and mainframe front ends, which require CD to act in this manner.)  
&C0 ignores the state of the carrier from the remote modem. CD is forced high.  
&C1 allows CD to act normally—to go high when the modem detects a carrier, and to  
drop when it loses the carrier.  
&Dn Data Terminal Ready Control  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: &D2  
The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal on pin 20 of the RS-232/V.24 interface must be  
high, or on, in order for the modem to operate. A high DTR signal tells the modem that  
the computer it is connected to is ready to communicate through the modem.  
The DTR signal can also be used to cause the modem to reset to its default parameters,  
as if you had given the modem an ATZ command.  
&D0 (or &D) causes the modem to ignore the DTR signal and treat it as always on.  
&D1 causes the modem, if in online data mode, to enter command mode, issue an OK  
and remain connected when the DTR drops.  
&D2 causes the modem to hang up when DTR drops while the modem is in online data  
mode.  
&D3 causes the modem to reset when DTR drops . It will also hang up if it is online.  
&Sn Data Set Ready Control  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: &S0  
Use the &S command to control the state of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal on the RS-  
232/V.24 interface. Normally, DSR follows CD. You can force the signal high or allow it to  
act normally.  
&S0 forces DSR high (on).  
&S1 allows DSR to act normally, that is, to follow CD.  
76  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Error Correction and Data Compression Commands  
You can configure modems to any of three different V.42 modes of operation (with or  
without compression): non-error correction, auto-reliable, and reliable modes. You also  
can turn data compression on or off.  
\Nn  
Error Correction Modes  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7  
Default: \N3  
Select the modem’s error correction mode using the \N command.  
\N0 disables the modem’s V.42 error correction capabilities, and the modem functions as  
a non-error correction modem with data buffering. This is the same as &Q6, described  
earlier in this chapter.  
\N1 causes the modem to function in direct mode.  
\N2 enables reliable mode, in which the modem uses its V.42 error correction capabilities  
for all transmissions. In reliable mode, the modem must be connected to a modem with  
the V.42 MNP protocol.  
\N3 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the  
online connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error  
correction. If the modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself  
into reliable (V.42) mode and enables error correction. If it determines that the other  
modem is not using V.42, the modem remains in non-error correction mode. (This is the  
same as \N5 and \N7.)  
\N4 enables reliable mode, in which the modem uses its V.42 error correction capabilities  
for all transmissions. In reliable mode, the modem must be connected to a modem with a  
V.42 protocol (MNP or LAP-M).  
The V.42 standard includes MNP Class 3 and 4 and LAP-M error correction methods.  
\N5 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the  
online connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error  
correction. If the modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself  
into reliable (V.42) mode and enables error correction. If it determines that the other  
modem is not using V.42, the modem remains in non-error correction mode. (This is the  
same as \N3 and \N7.)  
\N7 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the  
online connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error  
correction. If the modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself  
into reliable (V.42) mode and enables error correction. If it determines that the other  
modem is not using V.42, the modem remains in non-error correction mode. (This is the  
same as \N3 and \N5.)  
%Cn Data Compression  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: %C1  
The %C command allows you to disable data compression. Data compression is  
normally enabled.  
%C0 disables V.42bis/MNP 5 data compression.  
%C1 enables V.42bis/MNP 5 data compression.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Immediate Action Commands  
Use immediate action commands to obtain information about AT commands and current  
modem settings.  
A/  
In  
Repeat Last Command  
Default: None  
Type A/ to repeat the previous command. Do not precede this command with AT or press  
ENTER to execute it.  
Information Request  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 9  
Default: none  
This command displays specific product information about your modem.  
I0 or I returns the default speed and controller firmware version number. Use this  
command to identify your modem’s firmware level before calling Multi-Tech Technical  
Support. (This is the same as I3.)  
I1 calculates and displays the ROM checksum (for example, 12AB).  
I2 performs a ROM check, calculates and verifies the ROM checksum, and displays the  
results (OK or ERROR).  
I3 returns the default speed and controller firmware version number. Use this command  
to identify your modem’s firmware level before calling Multi-Tech Technical Support. (This  
is the same as I or I0.)  
I4 returns the firmware version for the data pump (for example, 94).  
I9 displays the country code (for example, NA Ver. 1).  
&Bn V.32 Auto Retrain  
n = 1  
Default: &B1  
The &B1 command enables V.32 auto retrain.  
&V  
View Current Configuration  
Default: none  
Use the &V command to display the active modem settings.  
78  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Flow Control Commands  
Flow control refers to techniques used by data terminal equipment and the modem to  
pause and resume the flow of information between them. It prevents a device from  
accepting more data than it can handle. The modem implements flow control in both  
directions. When the modem halts the flow of data, it is called flow control. When the  
computer halts the flow, it is called pacing.  
&Mn Communications Mode  
n = 0  
Default: &M0  
The &M command enables asynchronous communications mode. This is the default.  
&Kn Local Flow Control Selection  
n = 0, 3, or 4  
Default: &K3  
The &K command allows you disable flow control and enable hardware or software flow  
control.  
&K0 completely disables data flow control initiated by the modem. (This is the same as  
\Q0.)  
&K3 enables modem’s use of Clear to Send (CTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface  
to regulate data flow. When CTS drops, data flow is suspended until the signal goes high  
(on) again. This method of flow control works in conjunction with pacing (i.e., computer-  
initiated flow control), which uses the Request to Send (RTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24  
interface. Hardware flow control cannot be enabled unless an active error correction  
protocol is selected. This is the factory default setting. (This is the same as \Q3.)  
&K4 enables XON/XOFF software flow control. XON/XOFF flow control is an in-band  
method of data flow regulation. In-band data regulation means that the XON (^Q) and  
XOFF (^S) characters are inserted into the stream of data rather than using separate  
control lines. When an XOFF character is detected, the data stream is suspended until  
an XON character is detected. If you issue the &K4 command to the modem, it will  
respond to XON/XOFF pacing, and use XON/XOFF characters as its own method of flow  
control to the computer. (This is the same as \Q1.)  
The drawback to using this method of pacing is that some files may contain these  
characters as part of the file data. If such a file is transferred using a modem with XON/  
XOFF flow control enabled, the file transfer could fail due to indefinite suspension.  
\Qn  
Local Flow Control Selection  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
Default: \Q3  
The \Q command allows you disable flow control and enable hardware or software flow  
control.  
\Q0 completely disables data flow control initiated by the modem. (This is the same as  
&K0.)  
\Q1 enables XON/XOFF software flow control. XON/XOFF flow control is an in-band  
method of data flow regulation. In-band data regulation means that the XON (^Q) and  
XOFF (^S) characters are inserted into the stream of data rather than using separate  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
control lines. When an XOFF character is detected, the data stream is suspended until  
an XON character is detected. If you issue the &K4 command to the modem, it will  
respond to XON/XOFF pacing, and use XON/XOFF characters as its own method of flow  
control to the computer. (This is the same as &K4.)  
The drawback to using this method of pacing is that some files may contain these  
characters as part of the file data. If such a file is transferred using a modem with XON/  
XOFF flow control enabled, the file transfer could fail due to indefinite suspension.  
\Q3 enables modem’s use of Clear to Send (CTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface to  
regulate data flow. When CTS drops, data flow is suspended until the signal goes high  
(on) again. This method of flow control works in conjunction with pacing (i.e., computer-  
initiated flow control), which uses the Request to Send (RTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24  
interface. Hardware flow control cannot be enabled unless an active error correction  
protocol is selected. This is the factory default setting. (This is the same as &K3.)  
\Xn  
XON/XOFF Pass-Through  
n = 0  
Default: \X0  
When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the local modem has two options regarding the XON  
and XOFF characters. It can respond to and discard the characters from the computer, or  
it can respond to the characters and pass them through the data communications link to  
the remote modem, thereby pacing the remote modem as well.  
&X0 causes the modem to respond to and discard the XON and XOFF characters. This  
is the default.  
&Jn Auxiliary Relay Control  
n = 0  
Default: &J0  
The &J0 command causes the auxiliary relay to remain open. It is never closed. This is  
the default, and the only supported command format.  
\Gn  
\Jn  
Modem Port Flow Control  
n = 0  
Default: \G0  
This command returns an OK for backward compatibility with some software.  
Data Buffer Control  
n = 0  
Default: \J0  
This command enables data buffer control. Serial port speed is independent of connect  
speed.  
\J0 enables data buffer control. This is the default, and the only supported command  
format.  
80  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
\Kn  
Set Break Control  
n = 5  
Default: \K5  
This command determines how the modem processes a break signal received from the  
local DTE during an online connection.  
\K5 causes the modem to send the break to the remote modem in sequence with  
transmitted data, non-destructive, non-expedited.  
+ES=6 Enable Synchronous Buffered Mode  
Default: none  
This command allows an H.324 video application direct access to the synchronous data  
channel. On underflow, the modem sends HDLC flag idle (0x7E) to the remote modem.  
This special error correction mode is overridden by any of the following commands: &F,  
&M, &Q, and \N. +ES=? shows the only allowed value.  
Escape Sequences  
Escape sequences are also known as escape codes. They are used to cause the  
modem to enter command mode from online mode without disconnecting the call.  
+++AT<cr> In-Band Escape Sequence  
If the modem is online with a remote modem, you can cause the modem to enter  
command mode without disconnecting the call by typing an escape code. The default  
escape code used by the modem is three plus signs (+++) followed by the letters AT, up  
to 10 command characters (most typically H, to hang up), and ENTER. The modem then  
escapes to command mode, executes the command (if any), and remains in command  
mode. For example, to hang up the modem at the end of a call, type +++ATH <cr>.  
A
Force Answer Mode  
You can use the A command to force the modem into answer mode. Type ATA when in  
command mode to immediately bring your modem off-hook, out of command mode, into  
online answer mode, and to cause it to transmit its carrier signal over the phone line. If  
no responding carrier tone is received by your modem within forty-five seconds (or by the  
time you have specified in register S7), your modem stops transmitting its tone, hangs  
up, and goes back into command mode.  
On  
Go Back Online  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
Default: none  
Use the O command to bring the modem out of command mode and back into online  
mode. The O command reverses the result of entering the escape code. The O  
command brings modem into the online mode (originate or answer) it was in prior to  
entering command mode.  
O0 causes the modem to exit command mode and return to online data mode.  
O1 causes the modem to issue a retrain before returning to online data mode.  
O3 causes the modem to issue a rate renegotiation before returning to online data mode.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Diagnostic Commands  
Diagnostic commands help you troubleshoot your modem when problems occur.  
&Tn Self-Test Commands  
n = 0, 1, 3, or 6  
Default: none  
The &T command causes the modem to perform various self-tests.  
&T0 causes the modem to stop any test currently in progress.  
&T1 causes the modem to perform a local analog loop test, which verifies modem  
operation and the connection between the modem and the computer. Any data entered at  
the local DTE is modulated, then demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To function  
properly, the modem must be off-line.  
&T3 causes the modem to perform a local digital loopback test.  
&T6 causes the modem to perform a remote digital loopback test, which verifies integrity  
of the local modem, the communications link, and the remote modem. Any data entered  
at the local DTE is sent to, and returned from, the remote modem. To function properly,  
the modems must be online with error correction disabled.  
Speaker Settings  
These commands allow you to adjust your modem speaker settings.  
Ln  
Monitor Speaker Volume  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: L2  
The L command allows you to adjust your modem speaker volume.  
L0 causes the modem to use low volume. This is the same as L1.  
L1 causes the modem to use low volume. This is the same as L0.  
L2 causes the modem to use medium volume. This is the default.  
L3 causes the modem to use high volume.  
Mn  
Monitor Speaker Mode  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: M1  
The M command allows you to control the modem speaker mode.  
M0 completely disables the speaker.  
M1 causes the speaker to be on until a carrier signal is detected. This is the default. It  
allows you to hear the initial dial tones and handshake squawking when dialing out,  
which lets you know activity is taking place and when a carrier signal is detected (the  
squawking stops).  
M2 causes the speaker to remain whenever the modem is off-hook.  
M3 causes the speaker to remain on until the carrier is detected, except while dialing.  
This means the speaker is on during dialing, so you hear the dialing tones, but turns off  
during the handshake, so you eliminate the squawking.  
82  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Modem S-Registers  
This chapter describes the ISIHI-2S’s S-registers, which are small regions of memory  
where modem configuration information is stored. Whereas AT commands tell a modem  
what to do, S-registers tell the modem how to do it. Each S-register has a name that  
consists of the letter S and a number (S0, S1, S2, etc.), hence the term S-register. Use  
the Sr? command to read the value stored in an S-register and the Sr=n command to  
change it.  
S-Registers  
S0  
Number of Rings Until Modem Answers  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 0  
S0 defines the number of rings the modem waits before answering an incoming call. The  
default value is zero (0), which effectively disables the auto-answer function. When auto-  
answer is disabled, the modem can only answer via the ATA command. Set the S0  
register value to one (1) to causes the modem to answer the call immediately after the  
first ring. The maximum number of rings that can be configured is 255.  
S1  
Ring Count  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 0  
S1 counts the number of rings that have occurred. It is a read type of register and is  
seldom used in typical operation. Each time an incoming ring signal is detected, S1  
increases its value by one, up to a maximum of 255. If you set S1 to a value other than  
its default value of zero, or if the value is increasing with rings, this new value remains  
stored in S1 for eight seconds after the last ring is counted, after which the value reverts  
back to zero.  
S2  
Escape Code Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 43 (+)  
S2 defines the escape code character by its decimal ASCII code. The default character is  
the plus (+) sign (decimal 43). S2 may be set for any ASCII character. Setting an S2  
value greater than 127 results in no escape character and therefore no means of  
entering command mode from online mode without breaking the online connection,  
unless you use the BREAK method.  
Note: If you change the S2 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S3  
Return Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 13 (^M)  
S3 defines the carriage return character by its decimal ASCII code. The default setting is  
the ^M character (decimal 13), which is the code for ENTER on most keyboards. S3 may  
be set for any ASCII character.  
Note: If you change the S3 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
S4  
S5  
Line Feed Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 10 (^J)  
S4 defines the line feed character by its decimal ASCII code. The default setting is ^J  
(decimal 10), which is the code for the line feed key on most keyboards that have such a  
key. S4 may be set for any ASCII character.  
Backspace Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 8 (^H)  
S5 defines the backspace character by its decimal ASCII code. The default setting is the  
^H character (decimal 8), which is the code for BACKSPACE on most keyboards. S5 may be  
set for any ASCII character. Setting S2 to a value greater than 32 disables the backspace  
character.  
Note: If you change the S5 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
S6  
S7  
Wait Time for Dial Tone  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 2–65 (North America), 4–255 (International), 4–7 (U.K.)  
Default: 2 (North America), 4 (International and U.K.)  
S6 defines the length of time the modem waits after ENTER is pressed before executing a  
dial command. The default setting is two seconds for North America, four seconds  
elsewhere.  
Time to Wait for Carrier  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 1–255 (USA), 1–45 (Canada and International), or 1–55 (U.K.)  
Default: 50 (North America and International) or 55 (U.K.)  
S7 determines amount of time the modem waits for a carrier signal before it disconnects.  
The default value is 50 seconds except the UK model, which defaults to 55 seconds. This  
means that after dialing the modem waits for a carrier signal for up to 50 or 55 seconds  
and if none is detected terminates the call. The maximum S7 value is 255 seconds for  
the US model, 45 seconds for Canadian and International models, and 55 seconds for  
the UK model. S7 also determines the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier.  
84  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S8  
Pause Time for Comma  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 0–65 (North America), 4–255 (International), 4–7 (UK)  
Default: 2 (North America), 4 (International and UK)  
S8 determines the length of the pause caused by a comma character in a dialing  
command. The default setting is two seconds for the North American model and four  
seconds for the International and UK models. S8 may be set for up to 65 seconds. S8  
also defines the length of time the modem waits before retrying a call after it detects a  
busy signal. Some computer systems need more than two seconds to reset, in which  
case you should increase the value of S8.  
S10  
S11  
Carrier Loss Disconnect Delay Time  
Unit: 100 ms  
Range: 1–254  
Default: 20  
S10 defines the length of time, in milliseconds, that the modem waits after a loss of  
carrier signal before the it disconnects. The default setting is 2000 ms (20 units of 100 ms  
each). Maximum delay is 25400 milliseconds, or 25.4 seconds (decimal 254).  
Tone Dialing Spacing and Duration  
Unit: 1 ms  
Range: 50 - 150 (US) or 80–255 (Canada, UK, International)  
Default: 95 (US) or 80 (Canada, UK, International)  
S11 sets the speed of tone dialing (spacing and tone duration times). The default value is  
95 units for domestic models and 80 units for Canadian and International models, where  
each unit is one ms. In other words, for domestic modems, each tone is sustained for 95  
ms followed by a 95 ms pause. The minimum S11 value allowed is 50 ms (50 units). The  
maximum S11 value is 150 ms (150 units).  
S28  
S35  
Enable / Disable V.34 Modulation  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0, 1–255  
Default:1 (enabled)  
S28 enables or disables V.34 modulation. Setting S28 to zero (0) disables V.34  
modulation. Any other setting (1-255) enables V.34 modulation.  
Data Calling Tone  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0–1  
Default: 0 (disabled)  
S35 enables or disables the V.25 data calling tone, which allows remote data, fax and  
voice discrimination. Setting S35 to zero (0) disables V.25 data calling tone; setting S35  
to 1 enables data calling tone. The default setting is 1.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S37  
Maximum Dial Line Rate  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0–19  
Default: 0  
S37 sets the maximum dial line rate. When set to zero (0), the maximum dial line rate is  
the same as the maximum modem speed. This is the most common setting and allows  
other modem functions to actually determine the line rate used for each connection. It is  
the default. Consider using S37 to set a maximum dial line rate if you need to artificially  
retain a lower modem speed.  
0 = maximum modem speed  
1 = reserved  
13 = 19200 bps  
14 = 21600 bps  
15 = 2400 bps  
16 = 26400 bps  
17 = 28800 bps  
18 = 31200 bps  
19 = 33600 bps  
20 =  
2 = 1200/75 bps  
3 = 300 bps  
4 = reserved  
5 = 1200 bps  
6 = 2400 bps  
7 = 4800 bps  
8 = 7200 bps  
21 =  
9 = 9600 bps  
22 = 45000 bps  
23 =  
10 = 12000 bps  
11 = 14400 bps  
12 = 16800 bps  
24 =  
25 = 56000 bps  
S42  
Enable / Disable V.32bis and V.22bis Auto Rate  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0-1  
Default: 1 (enabled)  
This register is used for testing and debugging only.  
S42 enables and disables the V.32bis and V.22bis auto rate. Retrain and fallback are  
disabled in data mode. Set S42 to zero (0) to disable auto rate, or 1 (the default) to  
enable auto rate.  
S43  
Enable / Disable V.32bis Start-up Auto Mode  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0-1  
Default: 1 (enabled)  
This register is used for testing and debugging only.  
S43 enables and disables V.32bis start-up auto mode operation. Set S43 to zero (0) to  
disable start-up auto mode, or 1 (the default) to enable start-up auto mode.  
86  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S89  
Off-line Time  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 0, 5-255  
Default: 10  
S89 sets the length of time, in seconds, a modem waits in the off-line command mode  
before it goes into standby mode. If S89 is set to 20 seconds, the modem waits 20  
seconds in off-line command mode before going into standby mode. Setting S89 to zero  
(0) prevents the modem from ever entering standby mode.  
Setting S89 to any value between zero and five (1-4) effectively sets the value to five,  
because five seconds is the minimum possible wait time.  
Reading and Assigning S-Register Values  
Use the S command to assign a value to an S-register and to read an it’s current value.  
To read an S-register value, in terminal mode, type S, the S-register number, and a  
question mark (?), and press ENTER. For example, to display the value of register S7, type  
ATS7? and press ENTER. The value appears as a three-digit decimal number (e.g., 045).  
To assign a new value to an S-register, type S, the S-register number, an equals sign (=),  
and a decimal number. Convert all ASCII characters to their decimal equivalents before  
entering. Valid S-register decimal values are shown for each register in the previous  
section. To make the change permanent, use the &W0 command.  
Examples of Assigning Values  
1. You want to have longer pauses caused by the comma in a dial command: five  
seconds instead of two. Type ATS8=5 to assign 5 as the value for register S8. The  
modem now pauses five seconds for every comma in a dial command.  
2. You want to configure your modem to answer incoming calls after the fourth ring  
instead of after the first ring. To configure register S0 with a value of 4, type ATS0=4  
and press ENTER.  
3. You are calling long distance to another country code, and it is taking a long time to  
connect. The register S7 (time to wait for carrier) factory default setting of 50 seconds  
is insufficient; a time-out occurs and cancels the call before a connection is made. To  
change the S7 value to 75 seconds, type ATS7=75 and press ENTER. Now, after  
dialing, the modem allows 25 more seconds for a carrier signal before aborting the  
call. The additional 25 seconds should provide enough time for international calls.  
Examples of Reading Values  
1. To verify that you entered the value correctly in the preceding examples, type ATS8?  
and press ENTER in the first example, ATS0? in the second example, and ATS2? in  
the third example. You should receive the responses 005, 004, and 075, respectively.  
2. When configuring S-registers, it is a good practice to include the verification read  
command in the same command string as the configuration assignment command. In  
the three preceding examples, type ATS8=5S8?, ATS0=4S3?, and ATS7=75S7?,  
respectively.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
AT Commands that Affect S-Registers  
For maximum throughput, the ISIHI-2S’s default configuration is for originating a call to  
another 33,600 bps modem that supports error correction, data compression, and flow  
control. If the receiving modem is not compatible, the ISIHI-2S can match any ITU-T or  
Bell standard modem (but not proprietary protocols).  
If you require a different configuration for your application, for example, if you want to use  
an ISIHI-2S modem strictly as an auto answering device or for service that does not  
support error correction, you can change the command parameters and S-register values  
in active memory and save the new values with the &W command.  
The &W0 (or &W) command stores all current AT command and S-register values into  
nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) and configures the modem so that it reads  
your custom settings in NVRAM when the modem is turned on or when it is reset with the  
Z command. (The &F reset command will continue to read the factory default settings in  
read-only memory [ROM].) For convenience, you can include the &W command in the  
same command string that sets the new values in active memory as in the following  
example: AT\N2&C1S0=10&W0<cr>  
88  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Modem Result Codes  
Terse Verbose  
Definition  
0
1
OK  
Command executed without error; ready for next command.  
Modem has detected carrier and gone online.  
Modem has detected ring caused by incoming call.  
No carrier signal has been detected within the allowed time.  
Error in command line (too many, or invalid characters).  
CONNECT  
RING  
2
3
NO CARRIER  
ERROR  
4
5
CONNECT 1200  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
Modem detected carrier at 1200 bps and gone online.  
No dial tone detected.  
6
7
Busy signal detected.  
8
NO ANSWER  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
The remote system did not answer.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
Modem detected carrier at 2400 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 4800 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 9600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 14400 Modem detected carrier at 14400 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 19200 Modem detected carrier at 19200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 7200  
Modem detected carrier at 7200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 12000 Modem detected carrier at 12000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 16800 Modem detected carrier at 16800 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 300  
Modem detected carrier at 300 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 21600 Modem detected carrier at 21600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 24000 Modem detected carrier at 24000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 26400 Modem detected carrier at 26400 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 28800 Modem detected carrier at 28800 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 31200 Modem detected carrier at 31200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 33600 Modem detected carrier at 33600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 45000 Modem detected carrier at 45000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 56000 Modem detected carrier at 56000 bps and gone online.  
88  
89  
90  
DELAYED  
Delay is in effect for the dialed number.  
The dialed number is blacklisted.  
BLACKLISTED  
BLACKLIST FULL The blacklist is full.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4—MODEM AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Extended Result Codes. If the extended result codes configuration option is enabled,  
EC is added to the following result codes:  
5
CONNECT 1200  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
CONNECT 14400  
CONNECT 19200  
CONNECT 7200  
CONNECT 12000  
CONNECT 16800  
CONNECT 300  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
CONNECT 21600  
CONNECT 24000  
CONNECT 26400  
CONNECT 28800  
CONNECT 31200  
CONNECT 33600  
CONNECT 45000  
CONNECT 56000  
EC is replaced by one of the following codes, depending on the type of error control  
connection:  
Code  
V42bis  
V42  
Error Correction  
LAP-M V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
LAP-M V.42 error control only  
MNP5  
MNP4  
NoEC  
MNP4 error control and MNP 5 data compression  
MNP 4 error control only  
No error control protocol  
90  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TERMINAL ADAPTER  
5
AT Commands, S-Registers, and  
Result Codes  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Terminal Adapter AT Commands  
One of the ways you can communicate with and configure your terminal adapter (TA) is  
to use AT commands. AT commands are so-called because, with only a few exceptions,  
each command string begins with the characters AT. Using AT commands, you can read  
and set parameters and perform actions such as dialing.  
Entering AT Commands  
You can send AT commands to the TA by entering them on the keyboard, by typing them  
in the terminal window of a data communications program such as HyperTerminal, or  
indirectly by configuring your data communications program.  
Enter AT commands in the following format: AT <command string> <cr>. The AT  
characters cause the TA to interpret the following string of characters as a command. The  
command string consists of one or more commands. The carriage return character, <cr>,  
sends the command string to the TA. If you are entering a command string in your  
communication program’s terminal window, insert the carriage return character by  
pressing ENTER. On the other hand, if you are configuring a communications program,  
you typically must insert the carriage return character by adding ^M to the end of the  
command string.  
The TA has three modes of operation: offline command mode (the default state), online  
command mode, and data mode. The TA responds to AT commands only when it is in  
one of the command modes. After the TA establishes a connection and goes online in  
data mode, it interprets any further characters you enter as data rather than commands  
and transmits them to the remote device.  
When the TA is in data mode, you can switch it to online command mode by sending it an  
escape sequence. The TA responds to two types of escape sequences: in-band (escape  
sequence is part of the data stream) and out-of-band (escape sequence is outside the  
data stream). The in-band escape sequence is +++AT<cr>; the out-of-band escape  
sequence is <Break >AT<cr>. You can change the in-band escape character (+) by  
changing the value in register S2. You can send the break signal in the out-of-band  
escape sequence only from software, not by pressing SHIFT+BREAK on your keyboard.  
When it detects the escape sequence, the TA enters online command mode, in which it  
responds to commands while maintaining the connection with the remote device.  
The TA ’s command buffer can store 80 characters, including spaces and other  
characters used in telephone numbers. If you mistype a command string, you can edit it  
by using the backspace key, but only before you press ENTER. As you type a command  
string, it appears on your monitor screen, letting you verify your input as you type it.  
AT commands recognized by the ISIHI-2S terminal adapter are listed by function on the  
following page. For an alphabetic list of AT commands, see AT commands in the index.  
The commands in this chapter are organized by function. Abbreviated commands are  
listed on the following page by function along with a short description and page numbers  
that refer to a more detailed description, immediately following this list.  
92  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Topic  
Command  
Description  
Page  
Command Execution  
AT  
Return  
+++AT<cr>  
<BREAK>AT<cr>  
%A97  
Attention code  
94  
Command execution  
In-band escape code  
Out-of-band escape code  
Dialing method  
Switch type  
Switch Configuration  
94  
!C0  
!C6  
Data SPID  
*!C6  
Voice SPID  
!D3  
SAPI-0 data TEI  
SAPI-0 voice TEI  
*!D3  
!L  
>Dn  
List DN, SPID, TEI, Data protocol and switch type  
Embedded Protocol Analyzer  
!N1  
*!N1  
!Z=n  
En  
Data directory number  
Voice directory number  
Rate adaptation protocol  
Serial Port Configuration  
Command mode echo  
95  
L
List telephone numbers  
L5  
List current operating parameters  
List S-register values  
L6  
L8  
Display low level ISDN status  
Status displays  
Qn  
Sr=n  
Sr?  
Vn  
Set S-register  
Read S-register  
Terse/verbose result codes  
Connect messages  
Xn  
Z
Restore parameters to current power-up profile  
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) control  
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) control  
&Cn  
&Dn  
&En  
#Xn  
Flow control  
Send Single Multiple Xoff Characters  
&Fn  
&Rn  
&Sn  
&V  
Load quick setup factory profile  
CTS (Clear To Send) control  
DSR (Data Set Ready) control  
View port configuration  
Store active profile  
Store telephone number  
Dial a Stored telephone number  
Persistent DTR dialing  
Escape sequence options  
Parity  
&Wn  
&Zn=  
DSn  
$Dn  
%En  
@P3=  
@P4=  
@P6=  
A
Data bits  
Stop bits  
Data Call Commands  
Answer  
103  
D
H
Dial  
Hang up  
In  
O
Display product information  
Return online  
@Config  
Start ConfigMenu  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Command Implementation  
AT Attention Code  
Values: n/a  
Default: n/a  
AT precedes all command strings except the A/ command and escape codes.  
RETURN Command Execution  
Values: n/a  
Default: n/a  
Press the RETURN (ENTER) key to execute a command. The RETURN key is  
sometimes abbreviated <cr> in command examples.  
+++AT<cr> In-Band Escape Code  
Values: ASCII  
Default: + (43)  
Causes the TA to enter command mode without disconnecting the call when it is online  
with a remote device. The default escape code is three + characters, followed by AT, up  
to 80 command characters, and a RETURN (press ENTER). The TA escapes to  
command mode, executes any commands in the string, and then remains in command  
mode. Use the S2= z command to change the escape character.  
<break>AT<cr> Out-of-Band Escape Code  
Values: n/a  
Default: n/a  
Places the TA in command mode while remaining online. Enter a break signal, the letters  
AT, up to 80 command characters, and a RETURN (press ENTER).  
Switch Configuration Commands  
Use the following commands to select your network switch type (e.g., Northern Telecom  
DMS-100) and to specify other information required to make an ISDN connection.  
%A97=n Dialing Method  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: %A97=0 (En bloc)  
Standardized ISDN signalling protocols such as DSS1, DSS2, and SS7 support a  
sending complete indication, a signal that no more digits will follow. However, adding  
such a signal to a telephone number is often impractical; therefore, many private  
networks send the number of a called party by using a procedure called overlap sending,  
in which no sending complete indication is sent. Computer users, however, can  
automatically append the sending complete indication to the telephone number by  
choosing the en bloc method of sending, which results in faster call setup. Use the  
%A97= command to select between the two methods.  
%A97=0 En bloc sending during call SETUP  
%A97=1 Overlap sending during call SETUP  
94  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
!C0=n Network Switch Type  
Values:n = 0, 1, or 5  
Default: !C0=1 (Northern Telecom DMS-100)  
Use the !C0= command to select one of the seven network switch types supported by  
the ISIHI-2S. Factory default setting is !C0=1 (Northern Telecom DMS-100).  
!C0=0 AT&T 5ESS  
!C0=1 Northern Telecom DMS-100  
!C0=2 NET3 (Euro ISDN)  
!C0=5 US NI-1  
!C6=n SPID 0  
Values: n = 0–20-character string  
Default: null string  
Use the !C6= command to specify the channel 0 service profile identifier (SPID) that the  
ISDN service provider assigned at subscription time. The data SPID string can have up  
to 20 characters.  
Note: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is  
valid. For NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0–9 are valid. (Not needed for NET3  
switch type.)  
*!C6=n SPID 1  
Values:n = 0- to 20-character string  
Default: null string  
Use the *!C6= command to specify the channel 1 service profile identifier (SPID) that the  
ISDN service provider assigned at subscription time. The voice SPID string can have up  
to 20 characters.  
Note: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is  
valid. For NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0–9 are valid. (Not needed for NET3  
switch type.  
!D3=n TEI 0  
Values:n = 0–63, 240 (auto), 241 (disable)  
Default: !D3=240 (Auto TEI)  
Use to set the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) for channel 0. A TEI is a number used by  
the central office switch to identify uniquely each device that is connected to the network.  
When it uses dynamic TEI assignments (auto TEI), the central office switch assigns a  
TEI each time the TA connects to the network. However, the ISDN service provider may  
assign a fixed TEI at subscription time, in which case you must configure the TA with the  
fixed TEI number.  
You can also use the !D3= command to disable the data channel, which may be useful  
when multiple TAs are attached to a network terminator bus.  
!D3=0–63 Sets the TEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63  
!D3=240 Sets the data channel for dynamic TEI negotiation (factory default)  
!D3=241 Disables TEI  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
*!D3=n TEI 1  
Values:n = 0–63, 240 (auto), 241 (disable)  
Default: *!D3=240 (Auto TEI)  
Use the *!D3= command to set the ISIHI-2S’s terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) for  
channel 1. A TEI is a number used by the central office switch to identify uniquely each  
device that is connected to the network. When it uses dynamic TEI assignments (auto  
TEI), the central office switch assigns a TEI each time the TA connects to the network.  
However, the ISDN service provider may assign a fixed TEI at subscription time, in  
which case you must configure the TA with the fixed TEI number.  
*!D3=0-63 Sets the TEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63  
*!D3=240 Sets voice channel for dynamic TEI negotiation (factory default)  
*!D3=241 Disables TEI  
!L Display Network Configuration  
Values: n/a  
Default: n/a  
Use to display the ISIHI-2S’s current DN, SPID, TEI, Data protocol, and switch type.  
!L  
Displays the current network configuration  
>Dn Embedded Protocol Analyzer  
Values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 98 or 99  
Default: n/a  
Records and analyzes various protocols on the B-channel, D-channel, and DTE-DCE  
interface. The Embedded Protocol Analyzer is useful as a diagnostic tool, in that  
essential data messages display, which enables you to observe interactive operations of  
the TA, Central Exchange, and remote communications equipment.  
>D0 Display B-channel traffic, decoded as V.120  
>D1 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layers 2 and 3 (Q.921 and Q.931)  
>D2 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layer 2 only (Q.921)  
>D3 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layer 3 only (Q.931)  
>D4 Display B-channel traffic, decoded as X.75  
>D5 Display async PPP data  
>D6 Display sync PPP data  
>D98 Disable Embedded Protocol Analyzer, buffered data unchanged  
>D99 Enable Embedded Protocol Analyzer, clearing buffered data  
!N1=n DN 0  
Values: n = 24-character string  
Default: null string  
Sets the directory number (DN) for channel 0. The directory number is a telephone  
number assigned to the TA at subscription time by the ISDN service provider. The DN is  
a string of up to 24 characters; valid characters are 0–9, the * character, and the #  
character.  
!N1=n Sets the DN for the data channel  
96  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
*!N1=n DN 1  
Values:n = 24-character string  
Default: null string  
Sets directory number (DN) for channel 1. The directory number is telephone number  
assigned to the TA at subscription time by the ISDN service provider. The DN is a string  
of up to 24 characters; valid characters are 0–9, the * character, and the # character.  
*!N1=nSets the DN for the voice channel  
!Z=n Rate Adaption Protocol  
Values: n = 5, 9, or 12  
Default: !Z=9 (PPP)  
Selects the rate adaption protocol used to communicate with another terminal adapter.  
The local and remote terminal adapters must be set to the same protocol for  
communication to take place.  
!Z=5  
!Z=9  
V.120 protocol  
PPP protocol  
Serial Port Configuration Commands  
Use the following commands to control the interaction between the TA and the computer  
connected to it.  
En Command Mode Echo  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: E1 (Echo on)  
Normally, when you enter commands, the TA echoes the characters back to the  
computer or terminal where they display on the monitor. Use the E command to turn this  
feature on and off.  
E0  
E1  
Echo off  
Echo on  
L5 and L6 List Active Profile  
Values: n = 5 or 6  
Default: none  
Lists current operating parameters of the TA. This information is useful when changing  
communications software or when changing default settings. ATL5 lists AT command  
parameters, and ATL6 lists values currently stored in the S-Registers. (For more  
information on S-Registers, see Chapter 6, Terminal Adapter S-Registers.)  
L8 Lists Low Level ISDN Status  
Qn Enable/Disable Result Codes  
Values: n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: Q0 (Enable result codes)  
Controls whether the TA sends result codes to the computer. (Use the V command to  
select the format of the result codes.)  
Q0  
Q1  
Enable result codes.  
Disable result codes (quiet mode) for applications such as computer-  
controlled auto dialing.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Sr=n Set S-Register  
Values: r = 0, 2–5, 7, 10, 25, 32, 50-53; n varies  
Default: None  
Use to set the value of an S-register, where r is the number of the S-register, and n is the  
value you want to set. (For more information on S-Registers, see Chapter 6, Terminal  
Adapter S-Registers.)  
Sr? Read S-Register  
Values: r = 0–5 (S1 is read only) , 7, 10, 25, 32, 50-53; n varies  
Default: None  
Use to read the value of an S-register, where r is the number of the S-register. (For more  
information on S-Registers, see Chapter 6, Terminal Adapter S-Registers.)  
Vn Terse/Verbose Result Codes  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: V1 (Verbose)  
Use to control whether the TA’s result codes display as digits (terse) or as words  
(verbose). (Use the Q command to enable or disable the display of result codes.)  
V0  
V1  
Enable terse result codes.  
Enable verbose result codes.  
Xn Connect Messages  
Values: n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: X2 (Enable all messages)  
Use to select which result code messages the TA sends to the computer.  
X0  
X1  
X2  
Enables messages OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, and ERROR (terse  
result codes 0–4).  
Enables all messages except BUSY (terse result codes 0–5, 10–14, 17–19,  
28, and 32). If a call is placed to a busy line, NO CARRIER displays.  
Enables all messages (terse result codes 0–5, 7, 10–14, 17–19, 28, and 32).  
Z Reset to Stored Profile  
Values: none  
Default: none  
Resets TA to its current power-up profile and clears the command buffer. The result is the  
same as turning the TA off and on. When you type ATZ, the state of the &W command  
determines where default values originate. &W0 defaults come from the customized  
configuration in NVRAM, and &W1 defaults come from the factory default configuration in  
ROM. Because Z clears the command buffer, it must be the last command in a command  
string; normally it is issued by itself: ATZ. Note that whereas the &F0 reset command  
always restores the factory default profile, the Z reset command restores either the  
factory default or the stored profile, depending on how the &W command is set.  
98  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
&Cn DCD Control  
Values: n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: &C1 (DCD normal)  
Controls behavior of the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal. Normally, the DCD goes high  
when the TA establishes a connection and drops when the connection is lost. However,  
you can force DCD to remain high at all times or to remain high except for a brief drop  
following a disconnect.  
&C0 DCD is forced high at all times.  
&C1 DCD goes from low to high when TA establishes a connection (DCD normal).  
&C2 DCD drops briefly following a disconnect, then rises again. Register S10  
defines how long the DCD signal remains low after a disconnect.  
&Dn DTR Control  
Values: n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: &D1 (Exits Data Mode and re-enters AT command mode)  
Controls how the TA responds to the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal. A high DTR  
signal tells the TA that the connected computer is ready to communicate.  
&D0 TA ignores the DTR signal.  
&D1 If DTR lowers when the TA is online, TA hangs up, returns to command mode,  
and disables autoanswer. If the TA is offline, it doesn’t answer or dial while  
DTR is low.  
&D3 When DTR lowers, the TA resets the data port and disables autoanswer. If  
DTR lowers when the TA is online, the TA hangs up, resets the active  
configuration to the stored configuration, and disables autoanswer.  
Note: If you want to accept calls while DTR is low, the TA must be configured to ignore  
DTR. This is accomplished by entering AT&D0<cr>. With this configuration, the TA is able  
to accept calls while DTR is low. If this configuration setting is not made, the TA rejects  
incoming calls until DTR is high while the calls comes in.  
&En Flow Control  
Values: n = 3–7, 12, 13  
Default: &E4, &E6, &E13  
Selects method by which the TA controls the flow of data to and from the computer, to  
prevent either device from accepting data faster than it can handle. The TA provides flow  
control in both directions. When the TA halts data flow, it is called flow control; when the  
computer halts data flow, it is called pacing.  
&E3 Disable flow control by the TA.  
&E4 Hardware flow control. &E4 causes the TA to use the CTS signal to regulate  
flow control. When CTS goes low, data flow from the computer is suspended  
until CTS goes high again. This method works with pacing, which uses the  
RTS signal on pin 4. Hardware flow control cannot be enabled unless an error  
correction protocol is selected.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
&E5 XON/XOFF flow control. This is an in-band method, where the XON and  
XOFF characters (^Q and ^S, respectively) are inserted into the data stream,  
rather than using separate control lines. When an XOFF character is  
detected, the data stream is suspended until an XON character is detected.  
The drawback to this method is that some files may contain these characters,  
causing the file transfer to be suspended indefinitely.  
&E6 When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the TA responds to and discards the XON/  
XOFF characters from the computer.  
&E7 When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the TA responds to the XON/XOFF  
characters and passes them through the communications link to the remote  
device, thereby pacing the remote terminal adapter as well.  
&E12 Disables pacing  
&E13 Enables pacing.  
#Xn Send Single/Multiple Xoff Characters  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: #X0  
Allows the TA to send either a single or multiple Xoff characters to exert flow control to  
the terminal. The #X0 command (factory default setting) causes one Xoff to be sent until  
the TA ‘s buffer reaches the Xon level. The #X1 command causes an Xoff to be sent for  
every character received after the TA reaches its buffer full level.  
#X0  
#X1  
One Xoff character sent until the buffer reaches the Xon level (default)  
Multiple Xoff characters sent for every character received after buffer reaches  
the full level.  
&Fn Load Quick Setup Profile  
Values: n = 0-3  
Default: &F0  
For quick setup, the TA includes Quick Setup Profiles. Each /contains configuration  
parameters for a specific type of port operation. To load a Quick Setup Profile into active  
memory use the command &Fn, where n is the number of the profile you want to load.  
You then can customize the profile and store it with the &W command, so it loads  
automatically on power-up or reset. These profiles are stored in permanent memory and  
are not user-configurable. (See Appendix A.)  
&F0 Profile 0 — Modem-like operation (default)  
&F2 Profile 1 — V.120 async operation  
&F4 Profile 3 — PPP async operation  
100  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
&Rn CTS Control  
Values: n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: &R1 (CTS forced high)  
Allows you to control the state of the CTS (Clear to Send) signal. Normally the CTS  
signal follows the state of the RTS signal when TA is online.  
&R0 CTS acts normally; that is, it follows RTS.  
&R1 CTS is forced high, but still provides online flow control.  
&R2 CTS is forced high, but it drops on disconnect for the period of time set by  
S10. CTS still provides flow control when the TA is online.  
&Sn DSR Control  
Values: n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: &S1 (DSR normal)  
Controls the state of the DSR (Data Set Ready) signal on the RS232E/V.24 interface. A  
high DSR signal indicates to the computer that the TA is ready to transmit data.  
&S0 DSR is always high.  
&S1 DSR acts normally; that is, it follows the state of the CD signal, which goes  
high when the ISIHI-2S detects a carrier signal, and goes low when the carrier  
signal is lost.  
&S2 DSR is always high, except on disconnect, when it drops for the period of time  
set by S10 and then goes high again.  
&Vn View Port Configuration Parameters  
Values: n = 0, 1, 2  
Default: n/a  
Allows you to view the port configuration parameters for ports 0 and 1. This listing is the  
equivalent of both L5 and L6 combined.  
&V0 Displays port 0 configuration parameters.  
&V1 Displays port 1 configuration parameters.  
&V2 Displays both port 0 and port 1 configuration parameters.  
&Wn Store Active Profile  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: &W1 (Use factory default profile)  
Stores your active profile, or configuration, in memory, so you don’t lose your custom  
settings when you turn off the TA or reset it.  
&W0 Stores all current AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random  
access memory (NVRAM) and configures the TA so it reads your custom  
settings in NVRAM when the modem is turned on or when it is reset with the Z  
command. (The &F reset command continues to read the factory default  
settings in ROM.)  
&W1 Erases your custom settings in NVRAM the next time the TA is turned off or  
reset, causing the TA to read the factory default settings in ROM whenever it  
is turned on or reset.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
&Zn=x Store Telephone Number  
Values: n = 0–9; x = dial string  
Default: n/a  
Allows you to store a telephone number in a memory register for faster dialing. To store a  
number, type &Z, the register number (0–9) where you want to store the number, the =  
character, and the dialing string you want stored. Then press ENTER. The dialing string  
can have up to 80 characters. To read a stored number, type AT&Zn? (e.g., AT&Z4?)  
where n is the number of the register you want to read. To display a list of all numbers  
stored in memory, type ATL and press RETURN:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14082345678  
16125551212  
14089876543  
6313551  
4258513  
16126313550  
12138880123  
DSn Dialing a Stored Telephone Number  
Values: n = 0–9  
Default: n/a  
To dial a stored telephone number, type ATDSn in terminal mode, where n is the location  
of the number you want to dial. For example, typing ATDS6 <cr> dials a telephone stored  
in memory register 6 location.  
$Dn Persistent DTR Dialing  
Values: n = 0, or 1  
Default: $D0 (Disabled)  
Enables or disables persistent DTR dialing (PDD). PDD causes the terminal adapter to  
automatically and continually redial stored telephone number 0 when the port has no  
active calls and DTR is high.  
%En Escape Sequence Options  
Values: n = 0–5  
Default: %E1 and %E4  
By default, the modem responds only to the +++ escape method. However, you can use  
the %E command to set the modem to respond only to the <break> method, to respond  
to either +++ or the <break> method, or to ignore both methods and not escape.  
%E0 Modem won’t escape  
%E1 +++ escape method  
%E2 <BREAK> escape method  
%E3 Both +++ and <BREAK> escape methods  
102  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
%E4 Disable OK response to +++  
%E5 Enable OK response to +++  
%E1 %E5 Enable +++ method and OK response to +++  
%E3 %E5 Enable +++ or <BREAK> method and OK response to +++  
@P3=n Parity at Power-Up  
Values: n = 0–4  
Default: @P3=4 (None)  
Use only to set the type of parity the TA uses when turned on. Once the TA receives an  
AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to parity the computer is using.  
@P3=0  
@P3=1  
Odd  
Even  
Mark  
Space  
None  
@P3=2  
@P3=3  
@P3=4  
@P4=n Data Bits  
Values: n = 7 or 8  
Default: @P4=8 (8 data bits)  
Use only to set the number of data bits the TA uses when turned on. Once the TA  
receives an AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to number of data  
bits the computer is using.  
@P4=7  
@P4=8  
7 data bits  
8 data bits  
@P6=n Stop Bits  
Values: n = 1 or 2  
Default: @P6=1 (1 stop bit)  
Use this command only to set the number of stop bits the TA uses when turned on. Once  
the TA receives an AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to the  
number of stop bits the computer is using.  
@P6=1  
@P6=2  
1 stop bit  
2 stop bits  
Data Call Commands  
Use these commands to make or configure data calls.  
A Answer Call  
Values: none  
Default: none  
Forces TA to answer an incoming call. To cause the TA to autoanswer, set register S0 to  
a value higher than 0.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Dn Dial  
Values: string of up to 25 characters  
Default: none  
Causes TA to dial a telephone number (e.g., ATD785-3500 <cr>).  
Hn Hang Up  
Values: n = 0 or 1  
Default: H0  
Forces TA to go off-hook (to take control of the telephone line) or to go on-hook (hang  
up). Since the TA goes off-hook automatically when it dials, H command normally is used  
only to hang up. To hang up, you must first escape to command mode (+++AT <cr>),  
then type ATH (or ATH0) <cr>. Or, include the hang up command in the escape  
sequence: +++ATH <cr>.  
H0  
H1  
Go on-hook (hang up).  
Go off-hook.  
In Display Product Information  
Values: n = 0, 1, and 2  
Default: none  
Displays the following TA product information:  
I0  
I1  
I2  
Product ID (e.g., 247)  
Firmware version number (e.g., 1.00)  
Model number  
O
Return Online  
Values: none  
Default: none  
Returns TA to online mode from the online command mode. When TA makes a data  
connection, it enters online data mode. The TA typically remains in this mode until it  
receives an escape sequence or until the call ends. When it detects an escape  
sequence, the TA enters online command mode, where it can accept AT commands while  
retaining the online connection. To return the TA to online mode from the online  
command mode, enter the command ATO and press ENTER.  
@CONFIG Start ConfigMenu  
Values: none  
Default: none  
Starts TA’s internal configuration utility, which you can then use to customize the TA’s  
configuration for your particular application. You must enter the command while in your  
communication program’s terminal mode.  
104  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Terminal Adapter S-Registers  
S-Registers are sections of memory in which values are stored that affect how the TA  
operates. S-Registers are so-called because each has a name that begins with the  
character S. Use the S command to assign a value to or to read the current value of an  
S-register. To assign a value to an S-register, use the command Sr=n, in which r is the  
register number, and n is the value you want to assign to the register, e.g., S7=45. To  
read an S-register value, use the command Sr?, in which r is the register number, e.g.,  
ATS7?.  
S-Register Summary  
S-Register  
S0  
Function  
Rings until answer  
Ring count  
S1  
S2  
Escape character  
S3  
Carriage return character  
Line feed character  
Backspace character  
Wait for connection (abort timer)  
DCD Drop Time  
S4  
S5  
S7  
S10  
S25  
S32  
S50  
S52  
S53  
DTR Drop Time  
Escape sequence timeout  
Caller line ID (CLI)  
Auto-protocil detection  
Maximum frame size (X.75)  
S0 Number of Rings Until Answer  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 1  
Sets the number of rings the TA waits for before it answers and begins its connect  
sequence. S0=0 turns off the ability to automatically answer a call. S0=1 causes the TA  
to automatically answer after 1 ring. Note that if the S0 value is set too high, the calling  
device may time out before the TA answers the call. For autoanswer, S0 must have a  
non-zero value, DTR must be high (&D command), and the TA must be offline.  
S1 Ring Count  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 0  
Counts the number of rings that have occurred, up to a maximum of 255. It is a read-only  
register and is seldom, if ever, used in typical operation.  
S2 Escape Character  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 43 (+)  
Specifies the character used by the TA to escape from data mode and return to  
command mode.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S3 Carriage Return Character  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 13 (^M)  
Specifies the character used by the TA to indicate the end of a command line.  
S4 Line Feed Character  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 10 (^J)  
Specifies the character used by the TA to indicate the end of a status message.  
S5 Backspace Character  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0–32, 127  
Default: 8 (^H)  
Specifies the character used by the TA to delete the previous character in command line.  
S7 Wait for Connection (Abort Timer)  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 45  
Sets Abort Timer delay time, which is the length of time TA waits for a connection after  
dialing. If no connection is established during the specified time, the TA ends the call.  
S10 DCD Drop Time  
Unit: 50 ms  
Range: 0–254, 255  
Default: 20  
Sets the amount of time the DCD signal will be dropped when a call is disconnected if the  
DCD signal is configured for a momemtary drop on disconnect (&C2)  
S25 DTR Drop Time  
Unit: 100 ms  
Range: 0, 1–255  
Default: 5  
Sets the time that DTR must remain low before the TA disconnects. The S25 unit value  
for 0 is 40 ms. For values from 1 through 255, the unit value is 100 ms.  
S32 Escape Sequence Timeout  
Unit: 100 ms  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 20  
Sets the time allowed in an escape sequence from the receipt of the A in AT to the receipt  
of the carriage return. If the S32 time interval expires before you press ENTER, the escape  
sequence ends. The default time is 2 seconds.  
106  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
S50 Caller Line ID CLI  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0 or 1  
Default: 1 (enabled)  
Sets whether the mechanism for identifying the two endpoints of a connection is enabled  
or disabled. Since RING messages only appear for ISDN data calls, the CLI feature does  
not define a means of conveying Calling Party information to the terminal for ISDN voice  
calls. The CLI information is only included with the first RING message for a given  
incoming call, and appears as follows:  
RING  
FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000  
If the Calling Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP message,  
the RING message appears as follows:  
RING  
TO: 5551000  
If the Called Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP message,  
the RING message will appear as follows:  
RING  
FM: 5552000  
If neither the Called Party Number nor the Calling Party Number is included in the  
incoming SETUP message, the RING message will contain no additional information.  
S52 Auto-Protocol Detection  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0 or 1  
Default: 1  
Sets whether the mechanism for identifying V.120, X.75, or PPP, operation is enabled or  
disabled. This is applicable for an ISDN data call and once determined by the TA, the  
protocol used by means of the information conveyed by the SETUP message, then the  
indicated protocol is activated. The default setting is 1, which enables the Auto-Protocol  
Detection function.  
S53 Maximum Frame Size (X.75)  
Unit: Decimal ASCII code  
Range: 0-2048  
Default: 2048  
Sets the maximum size of data frames in X.75 mode. This register can be configured to  
contain as many as 2048 characters per frame, and is the TA’s default value  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Terminal Adapter Result Codes  
When the TA receives an AT command from the computer or terminal, it attempts to  
execute the command, then sends a status message to the computer or terminal that  
reports the result of the command. The TA provides you with several of these response  
messages, or result codes, which can be displayed on your monitor or intercepted and  
used by your communications software. Using the V command, you can select whether  
the result codes are terse (numbers) or verbose (words).  
The TA’s result codes are listed in the following table. Note that the speed of an ISDN  
channel is always either 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps. CONNECT messages indicate the speed  
of the connection between the TA and your computer or terminal.  
Terse  
0
Verbose  
OK  
1
CONNECT  
1P  
1PC  
1V  
1VC  
1X  
1XC  
2
CONNECT/PPP  
CONNECT/PPP COMPRESSED  
CONNECT/V.120  
CONNECT/V.120 COMPRESSED  
CONNECT/X.75  
CONECT/X.75 COMPRESSED  
RING  
3
NO CARRIER  
4
ERROR  
6
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
7
56  
56P  
CONNECT 56000  
CONNECT 56000/PPP  
56PC CONNECT 56000/PPP COMPRESSED  
56V CONNECT 56000/V.120  
56VC CONNECT 56000/V.120 COMPRESSED  
56X CONNECT 56000/X.75  
56XC CONNECT 56000/X.75 COMPRESSED  
64  
CONNECT 64000  
64P  
CONNECT 64000/PPP  
64PC CONNECT 64000/PPP COMPRESSED  
64V CONNECT 64000/V.120  
64VC CONNECT 64000/V.120 COMPRESSED  
64X CONNECT 64000/X.75  
64XC CONNECT 64000/X.75 COMPRESSED  
65 CONNECT MODEM  
108  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Using AT Commands to Operate the Terminal Adapter  
You can configure and operate the Terminal Adapter entirely with AT commands, if you  
want. Remember, you can issue AT commands only from a terminal or from a computer  
running a communications program in terminal mode. This section describes how to use  
AT commands for basic operations, such as calling, answering a call, and hanging up.  
Modes of Operation  
The TA has three modes of operation: offline command, online command, and data.  
Offline Command Mode  
In offline command mode, the TA communicates with the terminal or computer and  
responds to AT commands. There is no data communications link with a remote device.  
Data Mode  
The TA enters data mode when it makes a successful data communications link with a  
remote device. In data mode, the TA can send and receive data, but it does not respond  
to AT commands. Instead, it treats them as data, and transmits them to the remote  
device.  
Online Command Mode  
In online command mode, the TA responds to AT commands while maintaining a data  
communications link; however, transmission of data is suspended. To enter online  
command mode from data mode, type the escape sequence +++AT<cr>. To return to  
data mode from online command mode, type ATO<cr>.  
Making a Call  
Before you can place a data call, you must configure the TA for the local switch type,  
serial port speed, and the data type of the ISDN device you want to call.  
Dialing  
To dial a number using AT commands, you must first start a data communications  
program. In the program’s terminal mode, type ATDxxxxxxx<cr>, where xxxxxxx is the  
telephone number you want to dial, and <cr> is the carriage return character that is sent  
when you press ENTER , e.g, ATD7853500<cr>. The dial string can contain up to 80  
characters.  
To make it easier to read the dial string, you can use hyphens, spaces or parentheses.  
These characters are ignored by the TA. For example, the TA would read the following  
dial strings the same way:  
ATD16127853500 <cr>  
ATD 1-612-785-3500 <cr>  
ATD 1 (612) 785-3500 <cr>  
Canceling a Call  
To cancel a call before the TA makes a connection, press any key.  
MultliModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5—TERMINAL ADAPTER AT Commands, S-Registers, Result Codes  
Storing a Telephone Number  
To store a telephone number, type &Zn=x in terminal mode, where n is the number of the  
memory register in which the number is to be stored, and x is the dial command string  
that you want to store. For example, type AT&Z9=612-785-3500 <cr> to store the  
number 612-785-3500 in memory register 9.  
Dialing a Stored Telephone Number  
To dial a stored telephone number, type DS=n in terminal mode, where n is the location  
of the number you wish to dial. For example, type ATDS=3 <cr> dials a telephone stored  
in memory register 3 location.  
Displaying a Stored Number  
To display a stored telephone number, type &Zn? in terminal mode, where n is the  
memory register in which the number is stored. For example, type AT&Z5? <cr> to  
display the telephone number in memory register 5. To list all ten telephone numbers  
stored in memory, type ATL <cr>.  
Answering a Call  
You can answer incoming calls to the TA either manually or automatically. When the TA  
detects an incoming call, it turns on the RI signal on the V.24 interface and sends a RING  
result code to the computer or terminal after each ring. If autoanswer is enabled, the TA  
automatically answers the call. To manually answer the call, use the A command.  
Answering Manually  
If your communication program is in terminal mode when the RING result code appears  
on your monitor, manually answer the call by typing ATA <cr>.  
Answering Automatically  
To cause the TA to answer a call automatically :  
1. Enable autoanswer by setting register S0 to the ring on which you want the TA to  
answer (e.g., in terminal mode, type S0=4 to make the TA answer on the fourth ring).  
Youalso can use one of the configuration utilities to the turn autoanswer on and set  
the number of rings.  
2. Make sure that the TA is offline.  
The TA will answer the call after the number of rings specified by S0. To disable  
autoanswer, use a configuration utility or the command S0=0.  
Note: If the user wants to accept calls while DTR is low, the TA must be configured to  
ignore DTR. To ignore, enter AT&D0<cr>. With this configuration, the TA can accept calls  
while DTR is low. If this configuration setting is not made, the TA rejects incoming calls  
until DTR is high while the calls comes in.  
Hanging Up  
To hang up a call, first escape to online command mode (+++AT<cr>), then enter the H  
command (ATH<cr>). The escape sequence and hang up command can be combined  
into one command string: +++ATH<cr>.  
110  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
6
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting Guide  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter covers common problems you may have with your ISIHI-2S and how to  
solve them. Your ISIHI-2S was thoroughly tested at the factory before shipping. If you are  
unable to successfully connect, or if you experience data loss or garbled characters,  
during connecting, it is possible that the modem or terminal adapter is defective.  
However, it is more likely that the source of your problem lies elsewhere. Always make  
sure all hardware is properly connected. Then review the common problems listed in this  
chapter for recommendations on what to change or do. Problems you may encounter  
include the following:  
• The TA/modem does not respond to commands.  
• The TA/modem dials but cannot make a connection.  
• You can place data calls but not voice calls, or vice versa.  
• You cannot place two simultaneous data calls.  
• The TA/modem disconnects while online.  
• The TA/modem cannot connect when answering.  
• File transfer appears slower than it should be.  
• Data is being lost  
• There are garbage characters on the monitor  
If you experience problems, please check the following possibilities before calling Tech  
Support (see Chapter 6).  
112  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting Guide  
The Terminal Adapter Does Not Respond to Commands  
• Make sure you issue commands from the data communications software, either  
automatically or manually, in terminal mode. (You cannot send commands to the TA/  
modem from the DOS prompt.)  
• Make sure you are in terminal mode in your data communications program; then type  
AT and press ENTER. If you get an OK response, your connections are good and the  
problem likely is in your phonebook entry or session settings.  
• If you don’t get an OK, the problem may still be in the communications software. Make  
sure you have done whatever is necessary in your software to make a port connection.  
Not all communications programs connect to the COM port automatically. Some  
connect when the software loads and remain connected until the program ends.  
Others, like MultiExpress Terminal, can disconnect without ending the program (make  
sure the Connect icon looks plugged in). MultiExpress Terminal also allows multiple  
terminals to be open, but only one can access the modem/TA at a time.  
• Your communications software settings may not match the physical port where the TA  
is connected. The serial cable may be plugged into the wrong connector—check your  
computer documentation to make sure. Or, you may have selected a COM port in your  
software other than the one where the TA/modem is connected—compare the settings  
in your software to the connection.  
• Peripheral expansion cards, such as bus mouse and sound cards, may include a serial  
port preconfigured as COM1 or COM2. The extra serial port, or the card itself, may use  
the same COM port, memory address, or interrupt request (IRQ) as your  
communications port. Be sure to disable any unused ports.  
To look for address or IRQ conflicts if you use Windows 3.1x, select File then Run in  
Program Manager. Type MSD and press ENTER. Then select Mouse, COM Ports,  
and IRQ Status and note the addresses and IRQs that are in use. If you find an IRQ  
conflict, note which IRQs are not being used, then change one of the conflicting  
devices to use one of the unused IRQs. If you find an address conflict, change the  
address of one of the conflicting devices.  
To change a port address or IRQ in Windows 3.1x, double-click the Control Panel icon  
and then the Ports icon.Click the port you want to change; then click Settings and  
then Advanced and select the new port address and/or interrupt. If you want to use  
COM3 or COM4, note that COM3 shares an IRQ with COM1, as does COM4 with  
COM2, so you should change their IRQs to unused ones if possible.  
If you use Windows 95, right-click My Computer and select Properties. Click the  
Device Manager tab and then double-click Ports. Double-click the Communications  
Port where your modem/TA is connected. In the port’s Properties sheet, click the  
Resources tab to view the port’s Input/Output range and Interrupt Request. If another  
device is using the same address range or IRQ, it appears in the Conflicting Device  
List. Remove the check from Use Automatic Settings to change the port’s settings,  
so they do not conflict with the other device. Or, select the port the conflicting device is  
on and change it instead. If you need to open your computer to change switches or  
jumpers on the conflicting device, refer to the your computer’s documentation.  
• The serial port may be defective. If you have another serial port, install the TA on it,  
change the COM port setting in your software, and try again.  
• The TA may be defective. Call Tech Support for assistance (see Chapter 6).  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting Guide  
The Terminal Adapter Dials But Cannot Make a Connection  
Possible be several reasons the TA fails to make a connection include:  
• Lack of a proper physical connection to the communication line  
• A busy signal  
• A wrong number  
• No terminal adapter at the other end  
• A faulty communications device, computer, or software at the other end  
• Incompatibility between communications devices  
• An improperly configured ISIHI-2S TA  
Narrow the list of possibilities by using extended result codes. To enable them, enter  
ATV1X2 and press ENTER while in terminal mode or include V1X2 in the TA ’s  
initialization string (V1X2 is enabled by default). When you dial again, the TA reports the  
call’s progress.  
• If the modem/TA reports BUSY, the other number may be busy. Try again later.  
• If the TA reports NO CARRIER, no connection was made. You may have dialed the  
correct number, but the other computer or software was turned off or faulty. Check the  
number and try again or try calling another system to make sure your TA is working.  
Also, check that you accurately configured the TA with the correct switch type, TEIs,  
data protocols, and other parameters needed for a successful call (see Chapter 3).  
You Can Place Data Calls But Not Voice Calls, or Vice Versa  
• You might not have ordered both voice and data service from your ISDN provider.  
Check your contract or latest statement of service from your ISDN provider.  
• Your ISDN provider may have programmed the switch incorrectly. Call the provider.  
You Cannot Place Two Simultaneous Data Calls  
• You may not have ordered an ISDN line configuration that supports two simultaneous  
calls. Check your contract or latest statement of service from your ISDN provider. Also,  
your ISDN provider may have programmed the switch incorrectly. Call the provider.  
• You may have misconfigured your TA to dial two simultaneous data calls. The  
command AT&J1&W0<cr> is used to indicate whether outgoing calls should be made  
on two B-channels by default.  
• You may be using the wrong bundling dial modifier (e.g., ATD7853500&7853502<cr>).  
The ampersand in this command string is correct. Note other valid characters joining  
two telephone numbers include a Plus Sign (+) and an exclamation Mark (!).  
Note: In Windows 95, if the Use Country Code and Area Code box is checked in the  
Properties window for dial-up connection, the bundling modifier (i.e., &, + or !) is removed  
from the dialing string when the user attempts to make a connection. The solution is to  
not check the Use Country Code and Area Code box or to simply add the bundling dial  
modifier to the phone number at the time of connection.  
114  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting Guide  
The Terminal Adapter Disconnects While Online  
• Check for loose connections between the computer, the ISDN jack, and AC power.  
• The problem may have originated at the other end of the line. Try again.  
• If you were online with a BBS or online service, it may have hung up due to lack of  
activity on your part or because you exceeded your time limit for the day. Try again.  
The Terminal Adapter Cannot Connect When Answering  
• Autoanswer may be disabled. Turn on autoanswer in your data communications  
program, or send the command ATS0=1 to your TA in terminal mode.  
Note: If you want to accept calls while DTR is low, the TA must be configured to ignore  
DTR. This is accomplished by entering AT&D0<cr>. With this configuration, the TA is able  
to accept calls while DTR is low. If this configuration setting is not made, the TA rejects  
incoming calls until DTR is high while the calls comes in.  
File Transfer Appears Slower Than It Should Be  
• If you presently have a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) that is  
compromising data throughputs, we recommend you replace it with a special I/O card.  
• If you are running under Windows 3.1 and have a 16550AFN UART, you must replace  
the Windows serial driver, COMM.DRV, to take full advantage of the UART’s speed.  
• Check the serial port baud rate in your communications software and make sure it is  
set as high as your UART allows.  
Data Is Being Lost  
• Your UART may not be reliable at serial port speeds over 9600 bps or 19,200 bps.  
Reset your serial port speed to a lower rate or replace your serial port with a faster one.  
• Check the serial port baud rate in your communications software, and make sure it is  
set as high as your UART allows.  
• Make sure the flow control method you selected in software matches the method  
selected in the TA.  
There Are Garbage Characters on the Monitor  
• Your computer and the remote computer may be set to different parities. Check with  
the remote system with which you are communicating and set your communications  
software to use the same parity as the remote system.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6—Troubleshooting Guide  
116  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service, Warranty, and  
Technical/BBS  
7
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Introduction  
This chapter begins with the terms of your MultiModemISI’s five-year warranty. If you  
have questions or problems with your terminal adapter, carefully read the Technical  
Support section. It includes technical support telephone numbers, space for recording  
information about your ISIHI-2S, and information on how to send it in should you require  
service. The final sections explain how to get information and technical support from our  
BBS, how to upgrade ISIHI-2S via flash PROM, and information on the Compuserve/  
Internet forums.  
Limited Warranty  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. (MTS) warrants that its products will be free from defects in  
material or workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase, or if proof of  
purchase is not provided, five years from date of shipment. MTS MAKES NO OTHER  
WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY  
DISCLAIMED. This warranty does not apply to any products which have been damaged  
by lightning storms, water, or power surges or which have been neglected, altered,  
abused, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured,  
repaired by the customer or any party without MTS’s written authorization, or used in any  
manner inconsistent with MTS’s instructions.  
MTS’s entire obligation under this warranty shall be limited (at MTS’s option) to repair or  
replacement of any products which prove to be defective within the warranty period, or, at  
MTS’s option, issuance of a refund of the purchase price. Defective products must be  
returned by Customer to MTS’s factory transportation prepaid.  
MTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND UNDER NO  
CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ITS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR  
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS.  
On-line Warranty Registration  
To register your Multi-Tech product on-line, enter the following URL on your Internet  
browser:  
http://www.multitech.com/register  
118  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Service  
Multi-Tech has an excellent staff of technical support personnel available to help you get  
the most out of your Multi-Tech product. If you have any questions about the operation of  
this unit, call Technical Support at (612) 717-5863. Model and serial numbers are located  
on the Multi-Tech label on the component side of your ISIHI-2S. To display the firmware  
version, type ATI1 in terminal mode. Software versions are printed on the diskette labels.  
Before calling Technical Support, please note the status of your equipment. Include  
screen messages, diagnostic test results, problems with a specific application, etc.  
If your tech support specialist decides that service is required, your ISIHI-2S may be sent  
(freight prepaid) to our factory. Return shipping charges will be paid by Multi-Tech  
Systems (within North America).  
Include the following with your ISIHI-2S:  
• A description of the problem  
• Return billing and return shipping addresses  
• Contact name and phone number  
• Check or purchase order number for payment if the ISIHI-2S is out of warranty (The  
standard repair charge is $95. This price is valid at the time of this publication but could  
change in the future. Check with your technical support specialist.)  
• If possible, note the name of the technical support specialist with whom you spoke  
If you need to inquire about the status of the returned product, be prepared to provide the  
serial number (located on the Multi-Tech label on the component side of the card) of the  
product sent.  
Send the ISIHI-2S to:  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.  
2205 Woodale Drive  
Mounds View, Minnesota 55112  
ATTN: Service or Repairs  
The Multi-Tech BBS  
Multi-Tech maintains a bulletin board system (BBS) for its customers, which includes  
information on new products, product upgrade data, problem-solving tips, and a message  
service for requesting additional information. The phone number for the Multi-Tech BBS  
is (612) 785-3702. The BBS can be accessed by any asynchronous modem operating at  
1200 bps to 33,600 bps at a setting of 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit (8-N-1).  
To log on to the Multi-Tech BBS:  
1. Set your communications program to 8-N-1.  
2. Dial our BBS at +(612) 785-3702.  
3. At the prompts, enter your first name, last name, and password. Then press  
RETURN. If you are a first time caller, the BBS asks if your name is spelled correctly.  
If you answer yes, a questionnaire appears. You must complete the questionnaire to  
use the BBS on your first call.  
4. Press RETURN until the Main Menu appears. In the Main Menu you have access to  
three areas: the Files Menu, the Message Menu, and Bulletins. For help with menu  
commands, enter a question mark (?).  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Downloading a File  
If you know the file name:  
1. From the Main Menu, enter F to access the Files Menu, then enter D.  
2. Enter the name of the file you want to download from the BBS.  
3. If a password is required, enter the password.  
4. Enter Y or N to the automatic logoff question.  
5. Select a file transfer protocol by typing the indicated letter, such as Z for Zmodem  
(the recommended protocol).  
6. If you select Zmodem, the transfer begins automatically. If you select another  
protocol, you may have to initiate the transfer yourself. (In most data communication  
programs, the PAGE DOWN key initiates the download.)  
If you don’t know the file name:  
1. From the Main Menu, enter F to access the Files Menu. For a list of file areas, enter  
L twice. (If you don’t enter the second L, a list all of the files on the BBS appears.)  
2. Mark the file areas you want to examine by entering each file area’s list number and  
then press RETURN .  
3. Enter L to list all the files in the selected file areas. Enter C to go forward in the file  
list. Enter P to go back.  
4. Mark one or more files for download by entering M, the list numbers of the files, and  
then press RETURN .  
5. Enter D. A list of the files you marked appears. Enter E if you want to edit the list.  
Otherwise, enter D again to start the download process.  
6. Select a file transfer protocol by entering the indicated letter, such as Z for Zmodem  
(the recommended protocol).  
7. If you select Zmodem, the file transfers automatically. If you select another protocol,  
you may have to initiate the transfer yourself. (In MEWTERM and many other  
communications programs, the PAGE DOWN key initiates the download.)  
8. When the download is complete, enter S to return to the File Menu.  
Reading a Message  
When you log on, the BBS tells you if you have a personal message (mail). At the prompt  
Would you like to read it now?, enter R to read the message. This is the only point  
where you can read your mail. You cannot read messages from the Message Menu.  
Leaving a Message  
The Multi-Tech BBS has no public discussion area. To leave a personal message, select  
the Message Menu by entering M at the Main Menu. Enter E, then press RETURN to  
select the Sysop conference. Enter the name of the recipient (or Sysop), the subject, and  
the message text. Press ESCAPE to finish. Enter S to save the message and exit. To  
abort the message at any point, leave any of the fields blank and press RETURN.  
Bulletins  
When you log on, the BBS asks if you want to view the bulletin menu. Bulletins are  
menu-driven. To read a bulletin, enter its number. You also can access bulletins by  
entering B at the Main Menu.  
120  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
Upgrading the ISIHI-2S with FlashPro  
The ISIHI-2S has a flash PROM that contains firmware code for the hardware. At various  
times, Multi-Tech adds enhancements and/or fixes to the firmware. The flash technology  
used in the ISIHI-2S allows you load these upgrades into the PROM through the ISIHI-2S  
TA serial port.  
Using FlashPro to Upgrade Firmware  
1. Download FLASHPRO.ZIP and a new .HEX file from the Multi-Tech BBS.  
2. Unzip the FLASHPRO.ZIP file. Place this unzipped file and the .HEX file in the same  
directory.  
3. Run FlashPro by entering FLASHPRO, a space, -M and pressing ENTER at the  
DOS prompt.  
4. In the Main Menu, select Configure and press ENTER. Select Active Port and  
select the COM port to which the TA is connected. Select Baud Rate and select the  
rate at which you want to program. Press ESC when finished.  
5. In the Main Menu, select Select File to Program. Select the .HEX file. Press ESC  
when finished.  
6. In the Main Menu, select Program Firmware. When prompted to confirm the file to  
program, enter Y.  
7. If you need more assistance programming FlashPro, contact our Technical Support  
department.  
About CompuServe  
In addition to the BBS, Multi-Tech provides technical support through CompuServe’s  
Modem Vendor Forum (GOMODEMVEN) under GO MULTITECH. Refer to your  
CompuServe documentation for special operating procedures.  
About the Internet  
Multi-Tech is a commercial provider on the Internet, and we retrieve e-mail messages  
from the following mailboxes on a periodic basis:  
Technical Support  
Marketing Dept.  
Sales Dept.  
[email protected] International Marketing & Sales  
[email protected] Publications Dept.  
Multi-Tech’s presence includes a Web site at:  
http://www.multitech.com  
and an ftp site at:  
ftp://ftp.multitech.com  
The ftp server mirrors the Multi-Tech BBS.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7—Service, Warranty, and Technical/BBS  
122  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix A: Determining Current System Settings  
Use the instructions below to determine base I/O addresses and interrupt vectors for  
SCO and UNIXWare systems and to remove an existing device to free up its interrupt  
value.  
1. The serial device table is listed in the configuration directory. Type cd /etc/conf/  
sdevice.d and press ENTER.  
2. To view the contents of the table, type cat* | more and press ENTER.  
3. A table of entries and fields displays. The seventh and eighth fields of this table  
display the starting and ending I/O addresses for each device installed in your  
system. You must select a unique I/O address for each card you are installing, noting  
that each ISIHI-2S requires the base I/O address and the next seven addresses.  
Make certain that none of these addresses is being used.  
4. The sixth field from the left contains the interrupt values currently in use. If you  
require more interrupt values than are available, the serial I/O (sio) devices are good  
candidates for removal.  
To Remove an SIO Device  
1. You will be modifying three files to remove the serial drivers from the kernel. Edit /etc/  
conf/cf.d/mdevice. Look for the line that looks like this:  
sio  
Iocrwip  
iHctr sio  
0
5
1
2
-1  
Remove the r in the third column and save the modified file. This tells the Link Kit that  
sio is not a required device.  
2. Next, edit /etc/conf/sdevice.d/sio. Look for the line that corresponds to the COM  
port that you want to disable.  
sio  
sio  
Y
Y
1
1
7
7
1
1
4
3
3f8  
2f8  
3ff  
2ff  
0
0
0
0
Change the Y to N on the line of the appropriate COM port.  
3. Next edit /etc/conf/pack.d/sio/space.c. If you are removing COM 1, delete the  
following line from this file:  
{0, IBM_BOARD, 1,4,0  
(sd)0x3f8,0, 0,MCRBIT3}, /*ibm COM1*/  
If you are removing COM 2, delete the following line:  
{0, IBM_BOARD, 1,3,8  
(sd)0x2f8,0, 0,MCRBIT3}, /*ibm COM2*/  
4. After you have modified these files, continue with the ISIHI-2S driver installation using  
the freed IRQ value(s).  
124  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix B: Base I/O Switch Settings  
The table below provides the DIP switch settings for valid base I/O addresses of the  
ISIHI-2S. The switches can be set to OPEN (O in the table below) or to CLOSED (C in  
the table below). Holding the board with the switch facing you (reading numbers 1-8 left  
to right), the UP position for the switch is OPEN, and the DOWN position is CLOSED.  
S1 below is labeled as 1 on the left side of the switch and so on, through S8. For an  
example, turn to the next page and compare the default switch settings with the address  
200h listing.  
Address Switch Settings  
I/O Addr. DIP Switch Settings  
(hex)  
100  
108  
110  
118  
120  
128  
130  
138  
140  
148  
150  
158  
160  
168  
170  
178  
180  
188  
190  
198  
1A0  
1A8  
S1  
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
S2  
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
S3  
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
S4  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
S5  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
S6  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S7  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
S8  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
I/O Addr. DIP Switch Settings (continued)  
(hex)  
1B0  
1B8  
1C0  
1C8  
1D0  
1D8  
1E0  
1E8  
1F0  
1F8  
200  
S1  
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
S2  
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
S3  
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
S4  
S5  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
S6  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
S7  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
S8  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
208  
C
C
C
210*  
C
C
C
OPEN  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
218  
220  
228  
230  
238  
240  
248  
250  
258  
260  
268  
270  
278  
280  
288  
290  
298  
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
* Denotes default setting  
126  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
I/O Addr. DIP Switch Settings (continued)  
(hex)  
2A0  
2A8  
2B0  
2B8  
2C0  
2C8  
2D0  
2D8  
2E0  
2E8  
2F0  
2F8  
300  
308  
310  
318  
320  
328  
330  
338  
340  
348  
350  
358  
360  
368  
370  
378  
380  
388  
390  
398  
S1  
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
S2  
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
S3  
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
S4  
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
S5  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
S6  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S7  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S8  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
I/O Addr. DIP Switch Settings (continued)  
(hex)  
3A0  
3A8  
3B0  
3B8  
3C0  
3C8  
3D0  
3D8  
3E0  
3E8  
3F0  
3F8  
S1  
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
S2  
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
C
C
O
O
S3  
O
O
O
O
C
S4  
S5  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S6  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S7  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S8  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
128  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix C: Pin Assignments  
The MultiModem Hybrid Series comes with either U-interface or S/T-interface network  
connection cable, and analog fax/modem DAA. The U-interface connection cable is for  
direct ISDN line connection, which does not need any extra ISDN NT1 device. The S/T-  
interface connection cable is for connecting to NT1. Both the U- and S/T-interface use an  
RJ-45 phone jack but with different pin assignments. The bundled RJ-45 phone cord can  
be used for both U- or S/T-interface connections. The fax/modem DAA uses an RJ-11  
phone jack to connect to PSTN (analog telephone line) directly.  
The RJ-45 Pin-outs of U-interface  
Pin 1  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 4  
Pin 5  
Pin 6  
Pin 7  
Pin 8  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Not conntected  
Signal  
Signal  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Not connected  
The RJ-45 Pin-outs of S/T-interface  
Pin 1  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 4  
Pin 5  
Pin 6  
Pin 7  
Pin 8  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Transmit signal (T1)  
Receive signal (R1)  
Receive signal (R2)  
Transmit signal (T2)  
Not connected  
Not connected  
The RJ-11 Pin-outs of Analog Fax/Modem DAA  
Pin 1  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 4  
Pin 5  
Pin 6  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Tip  
Ring  
Not connected  
Not connected  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix D: ISIHI-2S Testing Utilities  
This disk contains two files to be used in conjunction with MutiModemISI boards. These  
files are described in two sections:  
• Operation with factory default settings (file name: ISI608.BIN)  
• Operation with other than the factory default settings (file name: 608TERM.EXE)  
Note: This program is a DOS utility.  
1. Operation with factory default settings:  
The 608TERM.EXE program is a utility program that emulates a terminal to test the  
connection from PC keyboard to ISI board to Modem to ISI board to PC display. Before  
executing 608TERM, the program must be executed to initialize the ISI board (when the  
ISI board’s factory settings are unchanged). The following displays:  
ISI608 Terminal Utility Version 1.00  
Loading Firmware to ISI608 located at address 200h  
Loading default file: ISI608.BIN  
ISI608 loading firmware . . .  
ISI608 verifying firmware . . . Verify OK.  
ISI608 firmware loaded successsfully.  
ISI firmware loaded successfully . . .  
Enter 1 to 8 for eight ports ISI.  
Enter port number?  
Note: This program must be run anytime the PC is powered down or rebooted.  
The first step in this utility is to identify the port to be tested. In order for the test to  
function, the selected port must be connected to an activated modem. The valid entries  
for the MutiModemISI are 1 through 8. Once a port is selected, the following displays:  
Enter 8 == 1200 baud  
Enter 11 == 2400 baud  
Enter 15 == 9600 baud  
Enter 16 == 19200 baud  
Enter 17 == 38400 baud  
Enter 18 == 57600 baud  
Enter 19 == 115200 baud  
Enter the baud rate you wish to run?  
130  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
This step allows selection of a baud rate for testing. Once a baud rate is selected, the  
following displays:  
ISI Terminal Utility is ready. Press F10 to Exit.  
This message indicates that keyboard entry can now be performed. Any characters typed  
on the keyboard are sent through the MutiModemISI board to the modem and then  
returned to display on the PC screen. When operation is verified, exit the utility by  
pressing F10.  
2. Operation with setting other than factory defaults  
The 608TERM.EXE program is a utility program that emulates a terminal to test the  
connection from PC keyboard to ISI board to modem to ISI board to PC display. Prior to  
executing 608TERM, the program must be executed to initialize the ISI board.  
Enter 608TERM -h <cr> to display the 608TERM program requirements. The following  
displays:  
A:\>608TERM -h  
Usage is:  
ISIterm  
-1<2 to 7, 10 to 12 and 15> for specifying IRQ level.  
-A<address> for specifying base address.  
-H this help screen.  
Note: This program must be run anytime the PC is powered down or rebooted.  
Whenever the base IO address and/or the IRQ values have been changed, a parameter  
string must be added to the command line. The string takes the form of [-Axxxx], where  
xxxx represents the new base IO address value and [-Iy] and y represents the IRQ value  
selected. Three potential combinations exist for the formatting of the command line:  
1. Changing only the base IO address setting, the command line takes the form:  
608TERM [-Axxxx]  
2. Changing only the IRQ setting, the command line takes the form: 608TERM [-Iy]  
3. Changing both the base IO address and the IRQ settings, the command line takes  
the form: 608TERM [-Axxxx] [-Iy]  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
For example, if the base IO address switch setting were changed to 2C0h, the new  
command line would be: A:\>608TERM -A2C0  
The following displays:  
A:\>608TERM -A2C0  
Loading Firmware to ISI608 located at address 2C0h  
Loading default file: ISI608.BIN  
ISI608 loading firmware . . .  
ISI608 verifying firmware . . . Verify OK.  
ISI608 firmware loaded successsfully.  
ISI firmware loaded successfully . . .  
Enter 1 to 8 for eight ports ISI.  
Enter port number ?  
The first step in this utility is to identify the port to be tested. In order for the test to  
function, the selected port must be connected to a modem that is switched on. Valid  
entries for the MutiModemISI are 1 through 8. Once a port is selected, the following  
displays:  
Enter 8 == 1200 baud  
Enter 11 == 2400 baud  
Enter 15 == 9600 baud  
Enter 16 == 19200 baud  
Enter 17 == 38400 baud  
Enter 18 == 57600 baud  
Enter 19 == 115200 baud  
Enter the baud rate you wish to run?  
This step allows selection of a baud rate for testing. Once a baud rate is selected, the  
following displays:  
ISI Terminal Utility is ready. Press F10 to Exit./  
This message indicates that keyboard entry can now be performed. Any characters typed  
on the keyboard are sent through the ISI board to the modem and then returned to  
display on the PC. When operation has been verified, exit the utility by pressing F10.  
132  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix E: Configuration Profiles  
Quick Setup Factory Profiles  
For quick setup, the Terminal Adapter includes four Quick Setup Factory Profiles, each of  
which is configured for a specific type of port operation. You can load a Quick Setup  
Factory Profile into active memory by using the command &Fn, where n is the number of  
the profile you want to load. If you want, you can then customize the profile and store it,  
using the &W command so that it loads automatically when the TA is turned on or reset.  
These profiles are stored in permanent memory and are not user-configurable as such.  
&F0 Profile 0—Modem-like asynchronous operation (default)  
&F1 Profile 1—V.120 asynchronous operation  
&F2 Profile 2—X.75 asynchronous operation  
&F3 Profile 3—ML-PPP asynchronous operation  
Quick Setup Example  
The following procedure assumes you want to load, modify, and store Quick Setup  
Factory Profile 2 as your default configuration. (The parameters for Profile 2 are listed in  
Table A-3.)  
1. Select the profile closest to the requirements of your application, in this case, Quick  
Setup Factory Profile 2.  
2. In terminal mode, type AT&F2 and press ENTER. Quick Setup Profile 2 loads into  
the TA’s active memory.  
3. Enter any additional AT commands that you need to customize the selected profile to  
your application (see Chapter 5, Terminal Adapter AT Commands, S-Registers,  
Result Codes).  
4. Type AT&W0 and press ENTER to save your customized port configuration.  
5. Your customized profile now loads automatically whenever the TA is turned on or  
reset.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Profile 0 (&F0)—Modem-Like Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
Description  
&C1  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
&D1  
E1  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Disable Automatic Channel Bundling  
Disable Data Compression  
Enable +++ escape method  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
Asynchronous mode  
&J0  
&K0  
%E1  
%E4  
&M0  
@P3=4  
@P4=8  
@P6=1  
&R1  
No parity at power-up  
8 data bits  
1 stop bit  
CTS always high  
S0=1  
Answer after 1 ring  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 50 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Caller Line ID Enabled  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S50=1  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum Frame Size 2048 Characters  
DSR follows DCD  
$SB1152  
V1  
Select 115,200 bps for DTE interface  
Select verbose messages  
134  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Profile 1 (&F1)—V.120 Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
Description  
&C1  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
&D1  
E1  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Disable Automatic Channel Bundling  
Disable Data Compression  
&J0  
&K0  
%E1  
Enable +++ escape method  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
Asynchronous mode  
%E4  
&M0  
@P3=4  
@P4=8  
@P6=1  
&R1  
No parity at power-up  
8 data bits  
1 stop bit  
CTS always high ring  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 50 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Caller Line ID Enabled  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S50=1  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum Frame Size 2048 Characters  
DSR follows DCD  
$SB1152  
V1  
Select 115,200 bps for DTE interface  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=5  
Enable V.120 data protocol  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Profile 2 (&F2)—X.75 Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
Description  
&C1  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
&D1  
E1  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Disable Automatic Channel Bundling  
Disable Data Compression  
Enable +++ escape method  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
Asynchronous mode  
&J0  
&K0  
%E1  
%E4  
&M0  
@P3=4  
@P4=8  
@P6=1  
&R1  
No parity at power-up  
8 data bits  
1 stop bit  
CTS always high  
S0=1  
Answer after 1 ring  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 50 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Caller Line ID Enabled  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S50=1  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum Frame Size 2048 Characters  
DSR follows DCD  
$SB1152  
V1  
Select 115,200 bps for DTE interface  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=12  
Enable X.75 data protocol  
136  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Profile 3 (&F3)—ML-PPP Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
Description  
&C1  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
&D1  
E1  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Disable Automatic Channel Bundling  
Disable Data Compression  
Enable +++ escape method  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
Asynchronous mode  
&J0  
&K0  
%E1  
%E4  
&M0  
@P3=4  
No parity at power-up  
@P4=8  
8 data bits  
@P6=1  
1 stop bit  
&R1  
CTS always high  
S0=1  
Answer after 1 ring  
S2=43  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 50 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Caller Line ID Enabled  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S50=1  
S52=1  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum Frame Size 2048 Characters  
DSR follows DCD  
S53=2048  
&S1  
$SB1152  
Select 38,400 bps for DTE interface  
Select verbose messages  
V1  
!Z=9  
Enable MLPPP data protocol  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix F: Ordering ISDN BRI (2B+D) Lines  
Two ways to specify your ISDN line configuration to your service provider are:  
• Use ISDN ordering codes where the user and the Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) or  
Internet Service Provider (ISP) use common nomenclature to describe elements of  
service.  
• Use a building block approach where the naming conventions are not standard, and  
the user and provider must establish a set of provisioning options.  
Several lists of contacts for ISDN service providers are located at the end of this  
appendix.  
Loop Qualification  
The first step in ordering (provisioning) an ISDN BRI line is to contact your LEC and  
verify ISDN BRI loop availability in your location. There is a distance limitation of  
approximately 2 miles (1800 Kf) from the BRI loop. Each request for BRI is handled on a  
case-by-case basis. Once qualified, the LEC requires information on the type of  
equipment and protocol used. Most ISDN BRI is configured as voice and data. (Since  
LEC network primarily is analog, ISDN digital technology converts the digital signal into  
analog, transports it over its analog lines, and then re-converts it into digital data at the  
other end). As a general procedure, when ordering an ISDN BRI (2B+D) line:  
1. Plan ahead. The BRI line order may take four weeks or more to get provisioned.  
2. Contact your LEC representative early in the process to ensure ISDN BRI loop  
availability for your location.  
3. Provide the LEC representative with  
• Your correct address for the BRI service.  
• The type of equipment (e.g., Multi-Tech ISIHI-2S) and the protocol specifications  
it supports. Use the ISDN BRI (2B+D) Line Ordering Checklist provided later in  
this document for protocol specifications.  
• The type of jack required by the ISIHI-2S (i.e., RJ-45 male 2-wire U Basic Rate  
Interface).  
4. Wait for installation notification from the LEC. Ask the LEC representatiave what type  
of switch is used (AT&T 5ESS and NT DMS-100 are most prevalent).  
5. Ensure availability of an auxiliary analog line (if you plan to use the TA’s AUX RJ-11  
analog connector for a standard telephone connection). Make sure you have a 115  
VAC (60 Hz) power outlet near your computer for the TA’s two-prong outlet-mounted  
power transformer.  
6. Record all of the information provided by your LEC.  
138  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Bearer Service  
Circuit Switch Voice bearer (CSV) and Circuit Switch Data bearer (CSD) are broad  
categories of bearer service options that the phone companies can provide. Bearer  
services provide different types of guarantees about the reliability and synchronization of  
the data. Currently, there are ten different bearer services for circuit-mode and three  
services for packet mode.  
Bearer services are defined in terms of a number of attributes, which include mode  
(circuit or packet), structure (bit-stream or octet-stream), transfer rate (e.g., 64 Kbps),  
transfer capability (basically, the content, for instance speech, 7Khz audio, video, or  
unrestricted), and other attributes that specify protocols to use along with other things.  
The attributes of the bearer service are encoded into a bearer code (BC) that is sent  
every time a new connection is set up. In theory, this allows the switches to choose from  
a variety of different switching paths techniques, depending on requirements. In practice,  
the SPID determines what services are needed for switching, as this simplifies things for  
the telephone companies. The bearer code is not completely ignored; however, there are  
certain bearer services that are unavailable on your B-channels, based on how they are  
configured. It is important to note that the bearer code is sent to the switch every time a  
connection is established. However, the SPID is sent to the switch only when you  
physically attach your equipment to your phone line.  
At this time the switch gives your device a terminal equipment identifier (TEI), which is  
used from then on to identify all connection requests from that piece of equipment. This  
allows the switch to look at the TEI and bearer code, determine the SPID, and see if the  
bearer code and the SPID match up.  
Using ISDN Ordering Codes (IOCs)  
An organization called ISDN Solutions Group, made up of ISDN service providers and  
equipment vendors, formed to simplify the often complex task of ordering an ISDN line.  
Their method, supported by most (but not all) service providers, uses ISDN ordering  
codes to define the ISDN line configuration. Your ISDN TA has been tested to operate  
with the ordering codes B1, Capability C, Capability R, I2, J2, J3, Capability S, and M5.  
B1 (previously Generic Data B)  
• 1B service  
• Data only on 1 B channel  
• One directory number  
Capability C (previously Generic Data C)  
• 1B service  
• Alternate voice and data on one B channel  
• One directory number  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Capability R (previously Generic Data I)  
• 2B service  
• Data only on each B channel  
• Two directory numbers  
Applications include:  
• 115.2K or 128 Kbps data only (no voice capability)  
• Generic 115.2K/128 Kbps data transfer applications (including remote access and  
LAN/WAN connectivity and telecommuting)  
I2 (previously Generic Data I-1DN)  
• 2B service  
• Data only on each B channel  
• One directory number  
Not available on the Northern Telecom switch. Two directory numbers are required for 2B  
operation. In this case use J2.  
J2 (previously Generic Data J)  
• 2B service  
• Alternate voice and data on one B channel; data only on other B channel  
• Two directory numbers  
J3 (previously Generic Data J-1DN)  
• 2B Service  
• Alternate voice and data on one B; data only on other B channel  
• One directory number  
Not available on the Northern Telecom switch. Since two directory numbers are required  
for 2B operation, use J2.  
Capability S (previously Generic Data M)  
• Recommended IOC since it supports the most features for voice and data  
applications. However, ISDN tariffs in some areas may warrant ordering codes with  
fewer features (e.g., where there is an additional monthly charge for having voice  
service on both B channels). If yours is a data only application, Capability R may  
be more cost-effective.  
• 2B service  
• Alternating voice/data on each B channel  
• Two directory numbers  
Applications for Capability S include:  
• 115.2K or 128 Kbps data  
• 56K/64K bps data with voice or modem support  
• Generic 115.2K/128 Kbps data transfer applications (including remote access and  
LAN/WAN connectivity and telecommuting).  
140  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
M5 (previously Generic Data M-1DN)  
• 2B Service  
• Alternate voice/data on each B channel  
• One directory number  
Not available for services provided with Northern Telecom or AT&T switches. Since two  
directory numbers are required for 2B operation, use Capability S.  
Ordering ISDN Without IOCs  
The form below can guide you and your telephone company in specifying and obtaining  
ISDN service when IOCs are not used. To support most ISDN TA features, telephone  
service must meet certain requirements. These requirements are described in the  
following sections. Some features may be added or deleted, depending on your actual  
data service needs and availability in your area. Before ordering, talk to your telephone  
company about which services are provided in your area.  
Complete and fax the form below to your telephone company to request the proper ISDN  
line for use with your ISDN TA module.  
Name: ______________________________________________________________  
Address: ____________________________________________________________  
City: _____________________________ State: _____________________________  
ZIP Code: _________ Daytime Telephone Number: __________________________  
1. Request an ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line with:  
• U-Interface Reference Point  
• 2B1Q Line Coding.  
2. Choose one of the following:  
________ 2B+D Service (supports up to 128 Kbps), or  
________ 1B+D Service (supports up to 64 Kbps).  
3. Indicate the ISDN Switch Type and Software Protocol you will be using:  
________ AT&T 5ESS with:  
________ Custom, 5E6 and later software, or  
________ NI1 (National ISDN-1)  
________ Northern Telecom DMS-100 with:  
________ BCS-32 and later software (Pvc1), or  
________ National ISDN-1 (Pvc2)  
________ Siemens EWSD with National ISDN-1  
4. Request that the ISDN line you are ordering allocates one dynamic TEI (Terminal  
Endpoint Identifier) per phone number.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
5. Order specific services for your particular ISDN Switch:  
AT&T 5ESS—request a line with:  
Feature: Value  
B1 Service: DMD (On Demand)  
B2 Service: DMD (only if 2B+D ordered)  
Data Line Class: PM (Point-to-MultiPoint)  
Maximum B Channels: 2 (if 2B+D) or 1 (if 1B+D)  
Circuit Switched Voice (CSV) Bearer Channels: Any  
CSV Calls: 1 (recommended for test purposes)  
Number of Circuit Switched Data (CSD) Bearer Channels: Any  
Number of CSD Calls: 2 (if 2B+D ordered), or 1 (if 1B+D ordered)  
Terminal Type: Type A  
Turn these features OFF:  
Packet Mode Data  
MultiLine Hunt  
Multiple Call Appearances  
EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone Sets)  
Shared Directory Numbers  
Accept Special Type of Number  
Intercom Groups  
Modem Pools (Network Resource Selector)  
Message Waiting  
Hunting  
InterLATA Competition  
Northern Telecom DMS-100—request a point-to-multipoint line with:  
Line Type: Basic Rate, Functional  
Electronic Key Telephone Sets (EKTS): NoCall  
Appearance Handling (CACH): No  
Non-Initializing Terminal: No  
Circuit Switched Service: Yes  
Packet Switched Service: No  
TEI: Dynamic  
Bearer Service: Circuit Switched Voice and Data Permitted on any B channel  
(Packet Mode Data not permitted)  
6. Select a long distance carrier (record here)________________________  
7. Contact the selected long distance carrier and request Circuit-Switched 64 K bps  
Clear Channel Access (if available).  
142  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
8. Request the telephone company to provide ISDN TA configuring information (record  
here):  
• ISDN Switch Type: ____________________  
• ISDN Switch Protocol Version: ___________  
• ISDN Phone Number 1: ________________  
• ISDN Phone Number 2: ________________ (if 2B+D ordered)  
• ISDN Line Type: ______________________ (point-to-point or multipoint)  
• If MultiPoint, SPID Number 1:____________ (with prefix and suffix)  
• If MultiPoint, SPID Number 2:____________ (with prefix and suffix)  
9. If you use standard 5ESS or DMS-100, your protocol selection is complete. Fax the  
information in steps 1-8 to your phone company. If you use 5ESS Custom or DMS-  
100 Pvc1 protocol support, continue with 5ESS Custom or DMS-100 Pvc1 below.  
5ESS Custom Line Additional Parameters  
The AT&T 5ESS central office telephone switch supports a proprietary ISDN D-  
channel call control protocol called Custom, based on CCITT recommendations. The  
ISDN TA configured for switch type AT&T 5ESS works with lines providing this  
protocol on 5ESS switches with software version 5E6 or later.  
The ISDN TA supports the following configurations on 5ESS Custom lines:  
• Point-to-Point with one phone number (recommended configuration with no  
POTS interface)  
• Multipoint with one phone number  
• Multipoint with two phone numbers (recommended configuration with POTS  
interface)  
The requirements for the 5ESS line are shown below:  
B1 Service: DMD (On-demand)  
B2 Service: DMD (On-demand)  
Data Class Line: PM (Point-to-MultiPoint)  
Max. B Channels: 2  
Number of CSV Calls: 2  
CSV Bearer Channels: Any  
Number of CSD Calls: 2  
Circuit Switched: Any  
Terminal Type Bearer Channels: Type A  
Multipoint lines require the phone company to create a SPID for each phone number  
on the line. Except for the ability to spread two calls across two phone numbers,  
multipoint lines offer no special features and may create complications. However, if  
you use a multipoint line, the parameters are similar to the point-to-point lines, except  
for the SPIDs.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
The 5ESS switch provides supplementary features that the ISDN TA may not support.  
Enabling these features may have undesirable consequences. Features to avoid are:  
• Packet mode data  
• Multiline Hunt Groups  
• EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone Set)  
• Shared directory numbers  
• Intercom groups  
• Modem Pools (Network resource selector)  
• Message waiting  
• Hunting  
• Inter LATA competition  
• Accept special type of number  
If POTS interface is installed, the ISDN TA supports these supplementary features:  
• Two call appearances  
• Three- and six-way conferencing  
• Call transfer  
Only the second SPID uses these features, since the first SPID is the data-only port.  
DMS-100 Pvc1 Line Additional Parameters  
The Northern Telecom DMS-100 telephone switch supports a proprietary ISDN D-  
channel call control protocol called Protocol Version 1 (Pvc1) that is based on CCITT  
recommendations. The ISDN TA configured for switch type DMS-100 works with lines  
providing this protocol on DMS-100 switches with software version BCS-32 or later.  
The ISDN TA supports the following configurations on DMS-100 Custom lines:  
• Multipoint with one phone number (for 1B+D service)  
• Multipoint with two phone numbers (for 2B+D service)  
Requirements for the DMS-100 multipoint line are defined in Local Interface  
Requirements, Local Service Requirements, and below. Fax this information to your  
local phone company. The line should have two service profiles with the parameters  
below to support BONDING and the POTS port, if installed.  
Line Type: Basic rate, functional  
EKTS: No  
CACH: No  
Initializing terminal: Yes  
Bearer services: Circuit-switched voice & data permitted (Packet mode data not  
permitted)  
Circuit-switched service: Yes  
Packet-switched service: No  
Protocol version: Functional Pvc1  
TEI: Dynamic  
144  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
For More Information  
Several national and state organizations have ISDN line ordering information that can  
help when provisioning an ISDN BRI line.  
National ISDN Users Forum (NIUF)  
The National ISDN Users Forum (NIUF) implemented a series of Compatibility Packages  
(IOCs) to standardize and simplify ISDN ordering. For more information, contact:  
htttp://www.niuf.nist.gov/niuf/docs/428-94.html#SSets  
Vendors’ ISDN Association (VIA)  
Deepak Kamlani  
VIA, Inc.  
Bishop Ranch 2  
2694 Bishop Drive , Suite 105  
San Ramon, CA 94583  
Phone:+1.510.277.8110  
Fax: +1.510.277.8111  
Web: http://www.via-isdn.org  
National ISDN Council (NIC)  
Pat Donovan  
Phone:+1.201+649.7949  
Web: http://www.belcore.com/nic  
Contact Information – ISDN Service Providers  
United States  
AT&T Digital Long Distance Service  
http://www.att.com/home64/  
Ameritech  
http://www.ameritech.com  
Ameritech ISDN  
http://www.ameritech.com/products/data/isdn/index.html  
Ameritech ISDN Availability  
http://www.ameritech.com/products/data/isdn/isdnfrm1.html  
Ameritech Data Services  
http://www.ameritech.com/products/business/asg data_services.html  
Bell Atlantic  
http://www.bell-atl.com/  
Bell Atlantic Small Business ISDN  
http://www.bell-atl.com/isdn/sbs/  
Bell Atl. ISDN Fact Sheet  
http://www.ba.com/isdn.html  
Bell Atl. Residence Customer Information  
http://www.bell-atl.com/customer/consumer/home.html  
Bell Atl. Residence Customer ISDN  
http://www.bell-atl.com/customer/consumer/isdn/  
Bell Atl.Residential ISDN Market Trial  
http://www.ba.com/nr/95/jul/resisdn.html  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
BellSouth Telecommunications  
http://www.bell.bellsouth.com/  
BellSouth Corporate Page  
http://www.bellsouth.com/  
BellSouth ISDN Products & Services  
http://www.bell.bellsouth.com/products-services/isdn-main.html  
BellSouth ISDN InfoCenter  
http://www.ocn.com/ocn/isdn/isdn_top.html  
BellSouth ISDN Deployment  
http://www.ocn.com/ocn/bell/stats.html  
BellSouth ISDN Availability Lookup  
http://www.ocn.com/cgi-bin/lookup  
GTE  
http://www.gte.com/  
Switched Data Services  
http://wcn.gte.com/06prod/03SWITCH.html  
GTE Hawaii unofficial ISDN Page  
http://www.aloha.net/hol/docs/isdn.html  
Northern Arkansas Telephone Company  
http://southshore.k12.ar.us/natco1.html  
Nynex (nee New York/New England Tel)  
http://www.nynex.com/  
Pacific Bell (California, USA)  
http://www.pacbell.com/  
Pacific Bell Service Options and Rates  
http://www.pacbell.com/Products/SDS-ISDN/isd-22.html  
Search Pac Bell server for ISDN  
http://www.pacbell.com/cgi-bin/pbweb-search?textit=0&sspec=isdn  
Pacific Telesis Group  
http://www.pactel.com/  
Southwestern Bell Telephone  
http://www.sbc.com/  
Southwestern Bell ISDN info  
http://www.sbc.com/swbell/kc/128.html  
Southwest Bell Tariff  
http://www.icus.com/swbtariff.html  
Southwestern Bell Telephone Houston Digiline  
info http://www.icus.com/swb-hou.html  
SNET (Connecticut)  
http://www.snet.net/  
US West Faxback Service: 800-PATHWAY (item 99=Index)  
US West Center (Minneapolis): 800-223-7508  
U.S. West  
http://www.uswest.com  
U.S. West ISDN Info  
http://www.uswest.com/isdn/index.html  
WilTel  
http://www.wiltel.com/  
146  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Canada  
Stentor  
http://www.stentor.ca/  
CanISDN: The Canadian ISDN Resource Centre  
http://www.canisdn.net/  
Stentor ISDN Services  
http://www.stentor.ca/basie/products/isdn/isdn.html  
Europe  
Deutsche Telekom  
http://www.dtag.de/dtag/  
Euro-ISDN Informationen der Telekom  
http://www.netcs.com/NetCS-Public/edss1.ger.html  
France Telecom  
http://www.francetelecom.com/  
Sweden Telia AB Rgn V  
http://www.west.telia.se/  
Swiss Telecom  
http://www.vptt.ch/  
Netherlands Rollout voor de ISDN FAQ  
http://student.twi.tudelft.nl/~s674129/rollout.html  
Neuradne Telekom informacije (Slovenia)  
http://www.abm.si/~dalibor/telekom/  
Middle East  
Bezeq - Israel TeleComm  
http://www.bezeq.co.il/  
Israel  
http://wwwold.technion.ac.il/teach/topnet/cnpp95/ISDN_in_Israel/isdn.html  
Australia  
Telestra  
http://www.telstra.com.au/prod-ser/isdn/index.html  
Japan  
NTT  
http://www.ntt.jp/  
NTT official server  
http://www.info.hqs.cae.ntt.jp/  
NTT ISDN Info  
http://www.info.hqs.cae.ntt.jp/SER/ISDN/ISDN.html  
Russia  
Russian ISDN Home Page  
http://mp.aha.ru/koi/isdn/  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
ISDN User Groups  
Global ’95 Worldwide ISDN Solutions  
http://www.bellcore.com/GLOBAL95/home.html  
ISDN ’95 Symposium  
http://www.ieee.org/comsoc/ISDN.html  
PRIDUF Home Page (Pacific Region ISDN/Data User Forum)  
http://www.ptc.org/PRIDUF.html  
North American ISDN Users’ Forum (NIUF)  
http://www.niuf.nist.gov/misc/niuf.html  
NIUF INFORMATION HOME PAGE  
http://www.ocn.com/ocn/niuf/niuf_top.html  
The California ISDN Users’ Group CIUG Home Page  
http://www.ciug.org/  
The Florida ISDN Users Group  
http://www.ccg4isdn.com/isdn/fiug.html  
The New York ISDN Users Group  
http://www.interport.net/~digital/index.html  
The Texas ISDN Users Group (TIUG)  
http://www.crimson.com/isdn/  
Southern African ISDN Forum  
http://www.saif.org.za/  
IIIUF - Indonesian ISDN & Internet User Forum  
http://www.idola.net.id/i3uf/i3uf.htm  
Bellcore ISDN Home Page (Bell & NIUF documents)  
http://www.bellcore.com/ISDN/ISDN.html  
148  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix G: ASCII Conversion Chart  
CTRL CODE HEX  
DEC  
0
CODE  
HEX  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
DEC CODE  
HEX  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
DEC CODE HEX  
DEC  
96  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
SP  
!
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
97  
2
98  
3
#
$
%
&
99  
4
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
5
6
G
H
I
7
G
H
I
g
h
i
8
(
HT  
9
)
J
LF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
*
J
j
K
L
VT  
+
,
K
L
k
l
FF  
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
CR  
-
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
m
n
o
p
q
r
SO  
.
SI  
/
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
0
1
2
3
s
T
U
V
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
14  
15  
16  
20  
21  
22  
4
5
6
34  
35  
36  
52  
53  
54  
T
u
v
54  
55  
56  
84  
85  
86  
t
u
v
74  
75  
76  
157  
117  
118  
W
X
Y
Z
[
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
7
8
9
:
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
w
X
Y
Z
[
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
w
x
y
z
{
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
;
\
<
=
>
?
\
|
]
GS  
]
}
^
RS  
^
_
~
_
US  
DEL 7F  
NUL  
Null, or all zeros  
VT  
FF  
CR  
SO  
SI  
Vertical Tab  
Form Feed  
Carriage Return  
Shift Out  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN Cancel  
Sync.  
SOH Start of Header  
End Transmission Block  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
Start of Text  
End of Text  
EM  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
End of Medium  
End of Transmission  
Shift In  
Substitute  
ENQ Enquiry  
DLE  
Data Link Escape  
Device Control 1  
Device Control 2  
Device Control 3  
Device Control 4  
NegativeAcknowledge  
Escape  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
Acknowledge  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
File Separator  
Group Separator  
Record Separator  
Unit Separator  
Delete  
Bell or Alarm  
Backspace  
Horizontal Tab  
Line Feed  
GS  
RS  
HT  
US  
LF  
DEL  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix H: Dial Pulses and Tones  
Dial Pulses  
When you pulse dial, as when you make a call with a rotary dial telephone, your  
telephone or modem generates codes in the form of pulses that simulate the opening  
and closing of old-fashioned electric relays, or switches. The number of pulses in a code  
is the same as the digit they encode; thus, the digit 1 is represented by one pulse, the  
digit 2 by two pulses, etc. In the figure below, the digit 2 is pulse dialed, followed by the  
digit 1. Each pulse consists of an A ms open (break) and a B ms closed (make), where A  
is either 60 or 67 ms, and B is either 40 or 33 ms, for a total of 100 ms per cycle, or a rate  
of 10 pulses per second. The interdigital pause time is 800 ms. The pulse ratios are  
controlled by the &P command.  
B
Closed  
A
Open  
Digit 2  
Digit 1  
Tone Dial Frequencies  
The tone dialing method combines two frequencies for each of the twelve digits found on  
a touch-tone dial pad. This method is referred to as dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF)  
dialing.  
The four horizontal rows on a touch-tone keypad use four low-frequency tones (697, 770,  
852, 941 Hz), while the three vertical columns use three high-frequency tones (1209,  
1336, 1477 Hz). The tone frequency tolerance is ± 0.02%.  
For example, the digit 4 is dialed by combining two tone frequencies: 770 Hz from the  
second row, and 1209 Hz from the first column. In another example, the digit 9 is dialed  
with tone frequencies 852 Hz and 1477 Hz.  
Hz  
Digits  
697  
770  
852  
941  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
0
#
*
Hz 1209  
1336  
1477  
150  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
The extended DTMF characters (A, B, C, D) are the high-end frequencies (1633 Hz)  
defined on some telephone sets with a fourth vertical column of buttons. This fourth  
column provides for extended PBX control functions. The actual functions that are  
provided depend on the PBX manufacturer’s implementation and feature set.  
Hz  
Digits  
697  
770  
852  
941  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
A
B
C
0
#
D
*
Hz 1209  
1336  
1477  
1633  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix I: AT Command Summary (Modem)  
COMMAND DESCRIPTION  
AT  
Attention Code  
The attention code precedes all command lines except A/ and the escape sequence.  
RETURN RETURN Key  
or ENTER Press the RETURN (ENTER) key to execute most commands.  
A
Force Answer Mode  
Answer call immediately without waiting for ring.  
A/  
Repeat Last Command  
Repeat the last command string. Do not precede this command with AT. Do not press RETURN  
(or ENTER) to execute.  
Bn  
Answer Tone  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 15, or 16  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
Select ITU-T V.22 mode when modem is at 1200 bps  
Select Bell 212A when modem is at 1200 bps  
Deselect V.23 reverse channel  
Deselect V.23 reverse channel  
B15 Select V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps  
B16 Select Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps  
&Bn  
%B  
V.32 Auto Retrain  
n = 1  
&B1 Enable V.32 auto retrain  
View Numbers in Blacklist  
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the last call attempted in  
the previous two hours failed. In countries that do not require blacklisting, the ERROR result  
code appears.  
Cn  
Carrier Control  
n = 1  
C1  
Normal transmit carrier switching (included for backward compatibility with some software)  
&Cn  
Carrier Detect Control  
n = 0 or 1  
&C0 Force Carrier Detect on  
&C1 Let Carrier Detect follow carrier signal  
-Cn  
%Cn  
Ds  
Data Calling Tone  
n = 0 or 1  
-C0 Disable V.25 data calling tone  
-C1 Enable V.25 data calling tone  
Data Compression Control  
n = 0 or 1  
%C0 Disable V.42bis / MNP 5 data compression  
%C1 Enable V.42bis / MNP 5 data compression  
Dial  
s = phone #  
Dial telephone number s, where s may include up to 40 alpha-numeric characters, and the L, P,  
T, V, W, comma (,), colon (:), semicolon (;), !, $, @ and ^ dial string modifiers  
152  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
&Dn  
Data Terminal Ready Control  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
&D0 Modem ignores DTR signal  
&D1 When DTR drops while in online data mode, the modem enters command mode, issues  
an OK, and remains connected  
&D2 When DTR drops while in online data mode, the modem hangs up  
&D3 When DTR drops, modem hangs up and resets as if ATZ command had been issued  
DSn  
En  
Dial Stored Telephone Number  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Dial a number previous stored in directory number n by &Zn= command. For example, ATDS3  
Echo Command Mode Characters  
n = 0 or 1  
E0  
E1  
Do not echo command mode characters  
Echo command mode characters  
+ES=6  
Enable Synchronous Buffered Mode  
Allows an H.324 video application direct access to the synchronous data channel. On underflow,  
the modem sends the HDLC flag idle (0x7E) to the remote modem. This special error correction  
mode is overridden by any of the following commands: &F, &M, &Q, and \N.  
+ES=? Shows the only allowed value  
Fn  
Echo Online Data Characters  
n = 1  
F1  
Disable online data character echo (included for backward compatibility with some  
software)  
&Fn  
&Gn  
Load Default Configuration  
n = 0  
z&F0 Load factory default values as active configuration  
Guard Tones (International model only)  
n = 0, 1, or 2  
&G0 Turn off ITU-T guard tones  
&G1 Turn on ITU-T 550 Hz guard tone  
&G2 Turn on ITU-T 1800 Hz guard tone  
Note: The UK model is locked to &G2, which turns on the ITU-T 1800 Hz guard tone.  
\Gn  
Hn  
Modem Port Flow Control  
n = 0  
\G0 Returns an OK for backward compatibility with some software.  
Hook Control  
n = 0 or 1  
H0  
H1  
Go on-hook (hang up)  
Go off-hook  
In  
Information Request  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 9  
I0  
I1  
I2  
I3  
I4  
I9  
Display default speed and controller firmware version.  
Calculate and display ROM checksum (for example,12AB)  
Check ROM and verify the checksum, displaying OK or ERROR  
Display default speed and controller firmware version  
Display firmware version for data pump (for example, 94)  
Display country code (for example, NA Ver. 1)  
&Jn  
Auxiliary Relay Control  
n = 0  
&J0 The auxiliary relay is never closed.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
L
Redial Last Number  
Value in dialing command  
Must be placed immediately after ATD  
Ln  
Monitor Speaker Volume  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
L0  
L1  
L2  
L3  
Select low volume  
Select low volume  
Select medium volume  
Select high volume  
Mn  
Modem Speaker Control  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
M0  
M1  
M2  
M3  
Modem speaker always off  
Modem speaker on until carrier signal detected  
Modem speaker always on  
Monitor speaker on during dialing, off during handshaking  
&Mn  
Nn  
Communications Mode  
n = 0  
&M0 Asynchronous mode  
Modulation Handshake  
n = 0 or 1  
N0  
Modem performs handshake only at communication standard specified by S37 and the B  
command.  
N1  
Modem begins handshake at communication standard specified by S37 and the B  
command, but can fallback to a lower speed during handshake.  
\Nn  
Error Correction Mode Selection.  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7  
\N0 Non-error correction mode with data buffering (same as &Q6)  
\N1 Direct mode  
\N2 MNP reliable mode  
\N3 V.42\MNP auto-reliable mode  
\N4 V.42 reliable mode  
\N5 V.42, MNP, or non-error correction. Same as \N3.  
\N6 V.42, MNP, or non-error correction. Same as \N3.  
On  
Go Back On Line  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
O0  
O1  
O3  
Exit online command mode and return to data mode.  
Issue a retrain and return to online data mode.  
Issue a rate renegotiation and return to data mode.  
P
Pulse-Dial  
Value in dialing command  
Modem pulse-dials numbers that follow P.  
Qn  
Result Codes Enable/Disable  
&Q0 Asynchronous with data buffering. Same as \N0.  
&Q5 Error control with data buffering. Same as \N3.  
&Q6 Asynchronous with data buffering. Same as \N0.  
\Qn  
Local Flow Control Selection  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
\Q0 Disable flow control. Same as &K0  
\Q1 XON/XOFF software flow control. Same as &K4  
\Q3 RTS/CTS hardware flow control. Same as &K3  
Sr=n  
Set Register Value  
r = 0–8,10-11, 28, 35, 37, 42-43, or 89; n varies  
Set value of S-register r to value of n, where n is entered in decimal format.  
154  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Sr?  
Read Register Value  
r = 0–810-11,28, 35, 37, 42-43, or 89  
Read value of S-register r and display value in 3-digit decimal form.  
&Sn  
Data Set Ready Control  
n = 0 or 1  
&S0 Force DSR high (on)  
&S1 Let DSR follow CD  
T
Tone-Dial  
Value in dialing command  
Modem tone-dials numbers following the T.  
&Tn  
Self-Test Commands  
n = 0, 1, 3, or 6  
&T0 Stop any test currently in progress  
&T1 Local analog loop test  
&T3 Local digital loopback test  
&T6 Remote digital loopback test  
\Tn  
V
Inactivity Timer  
n = 0  
\T0  
Disable inactivity timer  
Switch to Speakerphone Mode  
Value in dialing command  
Switches to speakerphone mode and dials the following number. Use ATH command to hang up.  
Vn  
Result Codes (Verbose/Terse)  
n = 0 or 1  
V0  
V1  
Result codes sent as digits (terse response)  
Result codes sent as words (verbose response)  
&V  
View Current Configuration  
Display the active modem settings  
\Vn  
Protocol Result Code  
n = 0 or 1  
\V0 Do not append protocol result code to DCE speed.  
\V1 Append protocol result code to DCE speed  
W
Wait for New Dial Tone  
Value in dialing command  
Causes modem to wait for new dial tone. (X2, X4, X5, X6, or X7 must be selected.)  
&Wn  
Store Configuration  
n = 0  
&W0 Store current settings in NVRAM; modem will load these at power-on or with the ATZ  
command instead of reading factory ROM defaults.  
Xn  
Result Codes and Call Progress Selection  
n = 0–7  
X0  
X1  
Basic result codes (CONNECT only); does not look for dial tone or busy  
Extended result codes (w/ CONNECT 1200, CONNECT 2400, etc.); does not look for dial  
tone or busy signal  
X2  
X3  
X4  
X5  
X6  
X7  
Extended result codes with NO DIAL TONE; does not look for busy signal  
Extended result codes with BUSY; does not look for dial tone  
Extended result codes with NO DIAL TONE and BUSY  
Extended result codes with NO DIAL TONE and BUSY  
Extended result codes with NO DIAL TONE and BUSY  
Basic result codes with NO DIAL TONE and BUSY  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
\Xn  
Yn  
XON/XOFF Pass-Through  
n = 0  
\X0 Respond to and discard XON\XOFF characters  
Long Space Disconnect  
n = 0  
Y0  
Disable sending or responding to long space break signal on disconnect.  
&Yn  
Select Stored Configuration for Hard Reset  
n = 0  
&Y0 Select stored configuration 0 at power-up (included for backward compatibility with some  
software)  
Z
Modem Reset  
Reset modem to default values. Defaults from NVRAM if &W0 is set; from ROM if &W1 is set.  
&Zn=x  
Store Telephone Number  
n = 0-3, x = dialing string  
Stores telephone dial string x in memory location n. Dial the stored number using the command  
ATDS=n.  
,
Dialing Pause  
In dial command  
Comma; causes dialing pause for time set by S8.  
;
Return to Command Mode After Dialing  
At end of dial command  
Semi-colon; causes immediate return to command mode after dialing  
!
$
Flash On-Hook  
In dial command  
Exclamation; causes modem to flash on-hook.  
Detect Call Card  
In dial command  
Causes modem to pause and wait for an AT&T call card bong or a 1600 Hz tone before  
processing the rest of the dial string.  
@
^
Quiet Answer  
In dial command  
Causes modem to wait for a ringback, then 5 seconds of silence before processing next part of  
command.  
Disable Data Calling Tone Transmission  
In dial command  
The modem does not transmit data calling tones.  
+++AT<cr> Escape Sequence  
Puts modem in command mode while still remaining on line. Type +++ followed by the letters A  
and T, up to ten command characters and a RETURN.  
156  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix J: S-Register Summary (Modem)  
Register Unit Range Default Description  
S0 1 ring 0, 1–255  
0
Sets the number of rings before the modem answers. ATS0=0 disables  
auto answer completely.  
S1 1 ring 0–255  
0
Counts the rings that have occurred.  
S2 decimal 0–255  
43 (+)  
Sets ASCII code for the escape code character. Values greater than 1227  
disable the escape sequence.  
S3 decimal 0–127  
S4 decimal 0–127  
S5 decimal 0–127  
13 (^M) Sets ASCII code for the RETURN character.  
10 (^J) Sets ASCII code for the LINE FEED character.  
8 (^H)  
Sets ASCII code for the BACKSPACE character. Values greater than 32  
disable the backspace character.  
S6 1 sec  
S7 1 sec  
S8 1 sec  
2–65  
4–255  
4–7  
2
4
Sets the time the modem waits for a dial tone before canceling the call.  
1–255  
1–45  
1–55  
50  
45  
55  
Sets the time the modem waits for a carrier signal before aborting a call.  
Also sets the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier.  
0–65  
4–255  
4–7  
4
2
Sets length of pause caused by a comma character in a dialing command.  
4
4
S10 100 ms 1–254  
20  
Sets how long a carrier signal must be lost before modem disconnects.  
Sets spacing and duration of dialing tones. 50 ms is the minimum allowed.  
S11 1 ms  
50–150  
80–255  
80–255  
95  
80  
S28 decimal 0, 1–255  
1
0
0 disables, 1–255 enables V.34 modulation.  
S35 decimal 0–1  
0 disables, 1 enables the V.25 data calling tone, which allows data/fax/  
voice discrimination.  
S37 decimal 01–19  
0
Sets the maximum dial line rate.  
0 = maximum speed  
1 = reserved  
2 = 1200/75 bps  
3 = 300 bps  
4 = reserved  
5 = 1200 bps  
6 = 2400 bps  
7 = 4800 bps  
8 = 7200 bps  
9 = 9600 bps  
10 = 12000 bps  
11 = 14400 bps  
12 = 168000 bps  
13 = 19200 bps  
14 = 21600 bps  
15 = 24000 bps  
16 = 26400 bps  
17 = 28800 bps  
18 = 31000 bps  
19 = 33600 bps  
S42 decimal 0–1  
10  
1
For testing and debugging only.  
Enables / disables V.32bis and V.22bis auto rate. Retrain and fallback are  
disabled in data mode.  
0 = disable; 1 = enable.  
S43 decimal 0–1  
For testing and debugging only.  
Enables / disables V.32bis start-up auto mode operation.  
0 = disable, 1 = enable.  
S89 1 sec  
0, 5-255 10  
Sets the length of time in the off-line command mode before the modem  
goes into standby mode. A value of zero prevents standby mode; a value  
of 1-4 sets the value to 5.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix K: Result Code Summary (Modem)  
Terse Verbose  
Definition  
0
1
OK  
Command executed without error; ready for next command.  
Modem has detected carrier and gone online.  
Modem has detected ring caused by incoming call.  
No carrier signal has been detected within the allowed time.  
Error in command line (too many, or invalid characters).  
Modem detected carrier at 1200 bps and gone online.  
No dial tone detected.  
CONNECT  
RING  
2
3
NO CARRIER  
ERROR  
4
5
CONNECT 1200  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
6
7
Busy signal detected.  
8
NO ANSWER  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
The remote system did not answer.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
Modem detected carrier at 2400 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 4800 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 9600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 14400 Modem detected carrier at 14400 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 19200 Modem detected carrier at 19200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 7200  
Modem detected carrier at 7200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 12000 Modem detected carrier at 12000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 16800 Modem detected carrier at 16800 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 300  
Modem detected carrier at 300 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 21600 Modem detected carrier at 21600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 24000 Modem detected carrier at 24000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 26400 Modem detected carrier at 26400 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 28800 Modem detected carrier at 28800 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 31200 Modem detected carrier at 31200 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 33600 Modem detected carrier at 33600 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 45000 Modem detected carrier at 45000 bps and gone online.  
CONNECT 56000 Modem detected carrier at 56000 bps and gone online.  
88  
89  
90  
DELAYED  
Delay is in effect for the dialed number.  
The dialed number is blacklisted.  
BLACKLISTED  
BLACKLIST FULL The blacklist is full.  
158  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Extended Result Codes. If the extended result codes configuration option is enabled,  
EC is added to the following result codes:  
5
CONNECT 1200  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
CONNECT 14400  
CONNECT 19200  
CONNECT 7200  
CONNECT 12000  
CONNECT 16800  
CONNECT 300  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
CONNECT 21600  
CONNECT 24000  
CONNECT 26400  
CONNECT 28800  
CONNECT 31200  
CONNECT 33600  
CONNECT 45000  
CONNECT 56000  
EC is replaced by one of the following codes, depending on the type of error control  
connection:  
Code  
V42bis  
V42  
Error Correction  
LAP-M V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
LAP-M V.42 error control only  
MNP5  
MNP4  
NoEC  
MNP4 error control and MNP 5 data compression  
MNP 4 error control only  
No error control protocol  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix L: AT Command Summary (TA)  
How To Use AT Commands  
Usually, your data communication software controls the ISIHI-2S terminal adapters for  
you. However, you may also want to use AT commands,which give you complete control  
over the TAs. Be careful using these commands because  
loose its ability to control the TA. If you find that an AT command causes a problem, turn  
the computer off and then back on to reset AT commands to the factory default settings.  
You also can type AT&F to return to the factory default setting.  
To use an AT command, you must first:  
1. Run your communication software.  
2. Configure the software for the appropriate COM port and IRQ settings, if necessary.  
3. Enter Terminal mode (aka Command mode, Local mode, or Direct mode). This is the  
mode in which most data comm software packages start up. Type the AT command  
and press ENTER. For example, type ATH0 and press ENTER to hang up the TA  
connection or AT&V and press ENTER to display current configuration.  
Most AT commands can be entered in strings (on the same command line) without  
spaces between the individual commands. For example: AT&VH0 <ENTER>.  
The TA usually returns a response (or Result Code) at the next line if it understands the  
command. The response usually is OK or ERROR unless the AT command provides  
other (extended) messages.  
COMMAND  
AT  
DESCRIPTION  
Attention Code  
The attention code precedes all command lines except A/ and the escape sequence.  
RETURN Return key  
Press the RETURN (ENTER) key to execute most commands (sometimes abbreviated <cr>).  
+++AT<cr> In-Band Escape Code  
TA enters command mode (without disconnecting the call) when online with a remote device.  
<break>AT<cr> Out-of-Band Escape Code  
TA enters command mode while remaining online.  
A
Answer Call  
Forces the TA to answer an incoming call. To cause the TA to autoanswer, set register  
S0 to a value higher than 0.  
D
Dial  
Causes TA to dial a telephone number (e.g., ATD785-3500 <cr>).  
DSn  
Dialing a Stored Telephone Number  
n = 0–9  
To dial a stored telephone number, type ATDSn in terminal mode, where n is the location of the  
number you want to dial. For example, typing ATDS6 <cr> dials a telephone stored in memory  
register 6 location.  
160  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
COMMAND  
En  
DESCRIPTION  
Command Mode Echo  
n = 0 or 1  
E0  
E1  
Echo off  
Echo on  
Hn  
Hang Up  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: H0  
Forces TA to go off-hook (to take control of the telephone line) or to go on-hook (hang  
up). Since the TA goes off-hook automatically when it dials, H command normally is  
used only to hang up. To hang up, first you must escape to command mode (+++AT  
<cr>), then type ATH (or ATH0) <cr>. You also can include the hang up command in the  
escape sequence: +++ATH <cr>.  
H0  
H1  
Go on-hook (hang up).  
Go off-hook.  
In  
Display Product Information  
n = 0, 1, and 2  
Default: none  
Displays the following TA product information:  
I0  
I1  
I2  
Product ID (e.g., 247)  
Firmware version number (e.g., 1.00)  
Model number  
L5 & L6 List Active Profile  
n= 5 or 6  
L8  
O
Lists Low Level ISDN Status  
Return Online  
Returns TA to online mode from the online command mode. When the TA makes a data  
connection, it enters online data mode. The TA typically remains in this mode until it  
receives an escape sequence or until the call is ended. When it detects an escape  
sequence, the TA enters online command mode, in which it can accept AT commands  
while retaining the online connection. To return the TA to online mode from the online  
command mode, enter the command ATO and press ENTER.  
Qn  
Enable/Disable Result Codes  
n = 0, 1  
Q0  
Q1  
Enable result codes  
Disable result codes for applications such as computer-controlled auto dialing  
Vn  
Xn  
Z
Terse/Verbose Result Codes  
Connect Messages  
Reset to Stored Profiles  
%A97=n Dialing Method  
n = 0 or 1  
%A97=0 En bloc sending  
%A97=1 Overlap sending  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
COMMAND  
%En  
DESCRIPTION  
Escape Sequence Options  
n = 0–5  
Default: %E1 and %E4  
By default, the modem responds only to the +++ escape method. However, you can use the %E  
command to set the modem to respond only to the <break> method, to respond to either +++ or  
the <break> method, or to ignore both methods and not escape.  
%E0 Modem won’t escape  
%E1 +++ escape method  
%E2 <BREAK> escape method  
%E3 Both +++ and <BREAK> escape methods  
%E4 Disable OK response to +++  
%E5 Enable OK response to +++  
%E1 %E5 Enable +++ method and OK response to +++  
%E3 %E5 Enable +++ or <BREAK> method and OK response to +++  
!C0=n  
Network Switch Type  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 5  
!C0=0  
!C0=1  
!C0=2  
!C0=5  
AT&T 5ESS Custom  
Northern Telecom DMS-100  
Europe ISDN  
U.S. National ISDN-1 (NI-1), factory default  
!C6=n  
!D3=n  
Data SPID  
n = 0 to 20-character string  
SAPI-O Data TEI  
n = 0 to 63, 240 (auto), 241 (disable)  
!D3=0–63 SetsTEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63  
!D3=240 Sets data channel for dynamic TEI negotiation (factory default)  
!D3=241 Disables TEI  
!L  
Display Network Configuration  
!N1=n  
Directory Number 0  
n = 24-character string  
!N1=n  
Sets DN for channel 0  
!Z=n  
Rate Adaption Protocol  
!Z=5 V.120 protocol  
!Z=9 PPP protocol  
*!C6=n  
*!D3=n  
Voice SPID  
n = 0 to 20 character string  
SAPI-O Voice TEI  
n = 0 to 63, 240 (auto), 241 (disable)  
!D3=0–63 SetsTEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63  
!D3=240 Sets data channel for dynamic TEI negotiation (factory default)  
!D3=241 Disables TEI  
*!N1=n  
$Dn  
Directory Number 1  
n = 24-character string  
*!N1=n  
Sets DN for channel 1  
Persistent DTR Dialing  
n = 0, or 1  
Default: $D0 (Disabled)  
Enables or disables persistent DTR dialing (PDD). PDD causes the terminal adapter to  
automatically and continually redial stored telephone number 0 when the port has no active calls  
and DTR is high.  
162  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
COMMAND  
>Dn  
DESCRIPTION  
Embedded Protocol Analyzer  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 98, or 99  
>D0 Display B-channel traffic, decoded as V.120  
>D1 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layers 2 and 3 (Q.921 and Q.931)  
>D2 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layer 2 only (Q.921)  
>D3 Display D-channel traffic, decoding layer 3 only (Q.931)  
>D4 Display B-channel traffic, decoded as X.75  
>D5 Display async PPP data  
>D6 Display sync PPP data  
>D98 Disable Embedded Protocol Analyzer, buffered data unchanged  
>D99 Enable Embedded Protocol Analyzer, clearing buffered data  
#Xn  
&Cn  
&Dn  
&En  
&Fn  
&R  
Send Single/Multiple Xoff Characters  
DCD Control  
DTR Control  
Flow Control  
Factory Profiles  
CTS Control  
&Sn  
DSR Control  
n = 0, 1, or 2  
&S0 DSR is always high.  
&S1 DSR acts normally (follows state of CD signal—goes high when the ISIHI-2S detects a  
carrier signal and goes low when carrier signal is lost)  
&S2 DSR always high except on disconnect when it drops for period of time set by S10; then  
goes high again  
&Vn  
View Port Parameters  
n=0 Display port 0 parameters  
n=1 Display port 1 parameters  
n=2 Display port 2 parameters  
&Wn  
Store Active Profile  
n = 0 or 1  
&W0 Stores all current AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random access  
memory (NVRAM) and configures TA to read custom settings in NVRAM when modem  
turned on or when reset with Z command. (&F reset command continues to read factory  
default settings in ROM.)  
&W1 Erases your custom settings in NVRAM the next time the TA is turned off or reset, causing  
the TA to read the factory default settings in ROM whenever it is turned on or reset.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
COMMAND  
&Zn=x  
DESCRIPTION  
Store Telephone Number  
n = 0–9; x = dial string  
Allows you to store a telephone number in a memory register for faster dialing. To store a  
number, type &Z, the register number (0–9) where you want to store the number, the = character,  
and the dialing string you want stored. Then press ENTER. The dialing string can have up to 25  
characters. To read a stored number, type AT&Zn? (e.g., AT&Z4?) where n is the number of the  
register you want to read. To display a list of all numbers stored in memory, type ATL and press  
RETURN:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14082345678  
16125551212  
14089876543  
6313551  
4258513  
16126313550  
12138880123  
@CONFIG Start ConfigMenu  
Starts TA’s internal configuration utility, which you can then use to customize the TA’s  
configuration for your particular application. You must enter the command while in your  
communication program’s terminal mode.  
@P3=n  
Parity at Power Up  
n = 0–4  
Default: @P3=4 (none)  
Use only to set the type of parity the TA uses when turned on. Once the TA receives an  
AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to parity the computer is using.  
@P3=0  
@P3=1  
@P3=2  
@P3=3  
@P3=4  
Odd  
Even  
Mark  
Space  
None  
@P4=n  
Data Bits  
n = 7 or 8  
Default: @P4=8 (8 data bits)  
Use only to set the number of data bits TA uses when turned on. Once the TA receives  
an AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to number of data bits the  
computer is using.  
@P4=7  
@P4=8  
7 data bits  
8 data bits  
@P6=n  
Stop Bits  
n = 1 or 2  
Default: @P6=1 (1 stop bit)  
Use this command only to set the number of stop bits the TA uses when turned on.  
Once the TA receives an AT command from the computer, it automatically adjusts to the  
number of stop bits the computer is using.  
@P6=1  
@P6=2  
1 stop bit  
2 stop bits  
164  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix M: S-Register Summary (TA)  
S-Register Unit Range Default Description  
S0 1 ring 0–255  
S1 1 ring 0–255  
S2 decimal 0–127  
1
Sets number of rings before TA answers.  
Counts the rings that have occurred.  
0
43 (+)  
Sets ASCII code for the escape code character. Values greater than 1227  
disable the escape sequence.  
S3 decimal 0–127  
13 (^M) Sets ASCII code for the RETURN character.  
10 (^J) Sets ASCII code for the LINE FEED character.  
S4 decimal 0–127  
S5 decimal 0–32, 127 8 (^H)  
Sets ASCII code for the BACKSPACE character. Values greater than 32  
disable the backspace character.  
S7 1 sec 0–255 45  
Sets the time the modem waits for a carrier signal before aborting a call.  
Also sets the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier.  
S10 50 ms 0–254,255 20  
Sets how long a carrier signal must be lost before modem disconnects  
Sets time that DTR must remain low before TA disconnects.  
S25 100 ms 0, 1-255  
5
S32 100 ms 055  
20  
Sets the time allowed in an escape sequence from the receipt of the A in  
AT to the receipt of the carriage return.  
S50 decimal 0 or 1  
S52 decimal 0 or 1  
S53 decimal 0-2048  
1
Sets whether the mechanism for idenfitying the two endpoints of a  
connection is enabled or disabled.  
1
Sets whether the mechanism for identifying V.120, X.75, or PPP operation  
is enabled or disabled.  
2048  
Sets the maximum size of data frames in X.75 mode.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix N: Result Codes (TA)  
0
OK  
1
CONNECT  
CONNECT/PPP  
1P  
1PC CONNECT/PPP COMPRESSED  
1V CONNECT/V.120  
1VC CONNECT/V.120 COMPRESSED  
1X  
2
CONNECT/X.75  
RING  
3
NO CARRIER  
ERROR  
4
6
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
7
56  
56P  
CONNECT 56000  
CONNECT 56000/PPP  
56PC CONNECT 56000/PPP COMPRESSED  
56V CONNECT 56000/V.120  
56VC CONNECT 56000/V.120 COMPRESSED  
56X CONNECT 56000/X.75  
56XC CONNECT 56000/X.75 COMPRESSED  
64  
CONNECT 64000  
64P  
CONNECT 64000/PPP  
64PC CONNECT 64000/PPP COMPRESSED  
64V CONNECT 64000/V.120  
64VC CONNECT 64000/V.120 COMPRESSED  
64X CONNECT 64000/X.75  
64XC CONNECT 64000/X.75 COMPRESSED  
65 CONNECT MODEM  
166  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix O: Regulatory Agency Information  
Federal Communications Commission Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a  
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
FCC Regulations for Telephone Line Interconnection  
1. No repairs are to be made by you. Repairs are to be made only by Multi-Tech  
Systems or its licensees. Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty.  
Contact Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. for details of how to have repairs made.  
2. When trouble is experienced, you must disconnect your modem from the telephone  
company’s jack to determine the cause of the trouble, and reconnect your modem  
only when the trouble is corrected.  
3. The modem cannot be connected to pay telephones or party lines.  
4. If requested by the telephone company, you must notify them of the following before  
the ISIHI-2S is installed:  
a. The particular phone line (phone number) to which the connection is to be made.  
b. The FCC Registration Number.  
c. The manufacturer’s name and model number:  
Multi-Tech Systems - Model ISIHI-2S  
5. If the telephone company notifies you that your device is causing harm, unplug it. The  
telephone company may disconnect your service if necessary and also may change  
its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures which may affect operation of your  
equipment. Where practical, the telephone company must promptly inform you in  
writing of the temporary disconnect or change in service, give you the opportunity to  
make changes allowing uninterrupted service, and inform you of your rights to bring a  
complaint to the FCC.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
FCC Fax Warning  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use  
a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine  
unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each page or  
the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the  
business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone  
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.  
See your fax software manual for setup details.  
Canadian Limitations Notice  
Notice: The ringer equivalence number (REN) assigned to each terminal device  
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a  
telephone interface. The termination of a interface may consist of any combination of  
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the ringer equivalence numbers  
of all the devices does not exceed five.  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certificated equipment. This certification  
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment  
will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must  
also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be  
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service  
in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance  
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this  
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company  
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the  
power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are  
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should  
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
168  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
A
to correspond with the source signal. Compare with digital  
transmission.  
AC (Alternating Current): A power source whose signal  
crosses a reference voltage (usually called ground or zero). ANSI (American National Standards Institute – pro-  
Alternating between a maximum and minimum voltage, AC  
may also be referred to as a bi-polar signal.Contrast with  
DC.  
nounced “ansy”): A U.S. standards organization supported  
by over 1000 companies and trade organizations. It is a  
non-profit, non-government group that is the U.S. member  
of the ISO (International Standards Organization).  
ACK (ACKnowledgment code – pronounced “ack”): A  
communications code sent from a receiving modem to a  
transmitting modem to indicate that it is ready to accept  
ANSI character set: An 8-bit character set that contains  
256 characters. The first 128 characters are alphanumeric  
data. It is also used to acknowledge the error-free receipt of and the second 128 contain math and foreign language  
transmitted data. Contract with NAK.  
symbols.  
ACS (Asynchronous Communications Server): A  
communications server that managers a pool of modems  
for shared use over the LAN. It directs outgoing messages  
to the next available modem and directs incoming mes-  
sages to the appropriate workstation. It also provides  
conversion between LAN packets and asynchronous  
format.  
API (Application Programming Interface): The language  
and message format used by a program to activate and  
interact with functions in another program or in the hard-  
ware. A software module which provides a uniform interface  
for otherwise incompatible programs.  
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Inter-  
change – pronounced “askey”): A binary code for data  
that is used in communications and in many computers and  
terminals. The code is used to represent numbers, letters,  
punctuation and control characters. The basic ASCII code is  
a 7-bit character set, which defines 128 possible characters.  
The extended ASCII file provides 255 characters.  
Address: A numbered location inside a computer. It’s how  
the computer addresses its resources, like a video card,  
serial ports, memory, etc.  
Algorithm: A set of ordered steps for solving a problem.  
This can be a mathematical formula or the instruction in a  
computer program.  
Associate: Establishing that all files with a given extension  
are usable by a certain application.  
Alphanumeric: The basic character set which includes the  
letters A to Z (and a to z) and the digits 0 to 9.  
Asynchronous Transmission: The transmission of data in  
which each character is a self-contained unit with its own  
start and stop bits. This is a common method of transmis-  
sion between a computer and a modem. One character at a  
time, encoded into a series of electrical pulses, is transmit-  
ted or received. This is the oldest method of data transfer.  
When it is used with error correcting software and data  
compression algorithms, along with the increase it maxi-  
mum attainable speeds, it continues to be a viable alterna-  
tive to synchronous transmission.  
Amplitude: The difference between the maximum and  
minimum voltages of a waveform expressed as a “peak-to-  
peak” voltage.  
Amplifier: An active device within a circuit which increases  
the voltage level of all signals (desirable and undesirable).  
Analog loopback: A modem diagnostic used to test either  
the local analog loop (the modem’s internal circuitry) or the  
remote analog loop (the telephone line). The local analog  
loop test is accomplished by activating the self-test mode  
and tying the modem’s modulator to its demodulator and  
examining the return stream of data at the PC or terminal it  
services. The remote analog loopback can only be activated  
on four-wire leased line connections with a remote modem  
capable of performing the same test.  
ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode): A high speed  
switching technique suitable for MAN’s (Metropolitan Area  
Network) and broadband ISDN transmission.  
Auto Answer: A modem feature which enables the modem  
to “off-hook” when it detects an incoming call.  
Auto Dial: Some modems provide this feature for asyn-  
chronous dialing. This feature is a pre-defined macro that  
allows the user to enter the location of a phone number (i.e.  
N0 through N9) and have the modem go off-hook, dial and  
establish the connection. With the auto dial feature, an  
asynchronous terminal can establish a dialing directory  
without running a communication software package.  
Analog signal: A waveform which has amplitude, frequency  
and phase, and which takes on a range of values between  
its maximum and minimum points. Analog implies continu-  
ous movement from point A to point B, as opposed to  
discrete jumps. For example, sound is continuously varying  
air vibrations and is converted into analogous electric  
signals to be carried on a telephone line.  
AUTOEXEC.BAT (AUTOmatic EXECute BATch): A DOS  
batch file that executes when the computer is started. This  
file contains the basic start-up commands that help config-  
ure the system.  
Analog Transmissions: One of two types of telecommuni-  
cations which uses an analog signal as a carrier of voice,  
data, video, etc. An analog signal becomes a carrier when it  
is modulated by altering its phase, amplitude and frequency  
170  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Automatic Dialer: A device which is programmed to place  
a call to a predetermined number any time it is taken “off-  
hook”.  
binary value. Binary also refers to a file format that uses 8-  
bit characters , to allow for control characters (i.e., all non-  
ASCII files).  
B
BSC (Binary Synchronous Communications): Also  
called “bisync”, this communications protocol was the first  
synchronous data format used by IBM. It is still in use, but is  
rapidly being replaced by IBM’s newer Synchronous Data  
Link Control (SDLC). Bisync is a byte-synchronous protocol  
that has longer delays and more overhead that the bit-  
synchronous SDLC. It uses two synchronization characters  
Background: An activity that takes place in the PC while  
you are running another application. In other words, the  
active user interface does not correspond to the ‘back-  
ground’ task. In Windows™, the area behind the active  
window. Compare with foreground.  
Backup: Additional resources or duplicate copies of data on to head every packet.  
different storage media for emergency purposes.  
Bit (Binary DigIT): A bit is the basis of the binary number  
Band: The range of frequencies between two defined  
endpoints.  
system. It can take the value of 1 or 0. Bits are generally  
recognized as the electrical charge generated or stored by  
a computer that represents some portion of usable informa-  
tion.  
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of a computer  
channel, communications line or bus. It is expressed in  
cycles per second (hertz), the bandwidth being the differ-  
ence between the lowest and highest frequencies transmit-  
ted. The bandwidth of a phone line is about 3000Hz with  
QAM, you get up to 14,400 bps. Bandwidth is often stated  
in bits or bytes per second.  
Bit-synchronous transmission: A synchronous form of  
data transmission that focuses on a maximum packet size  
rather than the length of the characters the packet contains.  
SDLC is a bit-synchronous protocol.  
Boot: Starting or restarting your PC. This term originates  
Baseband signal: An unmodulated signal which is trans-  
from the saying “to pull oneself up by the bootstraps”.  
mitted at its original frequency and may be digital or analog.  
Bps (bits per second): A unit to measure the speed at  
which data bits can be transmitted or received. Bps differs  
from baud when more than one bit is represented by a  
single cycle of the carrier.  
Baud: Rate, the signaling rate of a line, the switching  
speed, or the number of transitions (voltage or frequency  
changes) that are made per second. Transmission speeds  
are often expressed in baud, though bits per second is  
more accurate. The speed at which your computer talks to  
your modem.  
Break-out box: An electronic device which is inserted  
between two RS232/V.24 connectors for the monitoring of  
pin activity and for the re-routing of lines (crossover).  
BCC (Block Check Character): An error control method  
used in character-oriented or byte-synchronous protocols.  
Two 8-bit BCCs are used to create the CRC (Cyclic Redun-  
dancy Check) field of a synchronous data packet.  
Broadcast: To send information simultaneously to a group  
of recipients.  
Buffer: A temporary storage register or Random Access  
Memory (RAM), used in all aspects of data communications  
which prevents data from being lost due to differences in  
transmission speed. Keyboards, serial ports, muxes and  
printers are a few examples of the devices that contain  
buffers. A buffer allows one device to dump data at a high  
speed and for the lower-speed device to accept it at its own  
pace. In this way, the high-speed device can continue to  
work without having to wait for its data transfer to end.  
Buffers are a way of preventing potential data loss.  
Bell 103: The U.S. modulation standard for 300 bps full-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines.  
Bell 201: The U.S. modulation standard for 2400 bps half-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines or full-duplex trans-  
mission over 4-wire lines. Primarily used in synchronous  
modems.  
Bell 202: The U.S. modulation standard for  
0-1200 bps, half-duplex transmission over 2-wise, or full-  
duplex transmission over 4-wire leased lines.  
Bus: A common channel between hardware devices either  
internally between components in a computer, or externally,  
between stations in a communications network.  
Bell 208: The U.S. modulation standard for 4800 bps, half-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines, or full-duplex trans-  
mission over 4-wire lines. Primarily used in synchronous  
modems.  
Byte: The unit of information a computer can handle at one  
time. The most common understanding is that a byte  
consist of 8 binary digits (bits), because that’s what comput-  
ers (PCs) can handle. A byte holds the equivalent of a  
single character, such as the letter “A”.  
Bell 212A: The U.S. modulation standard for 1200 bps full-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines.  
Binary: A numbering system based on two digits, 1 and 0,  
which is conductive to the two-state digital electronics used  
within computers. All input to a computer is encoded as a  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
C
clipboard can be pasted into the current document. Only  
one item may be on the clipboard at a time. When new copy  
is sent to the clipboard the existing copy is eliminated.  
When you shut down your computer, whatever is on the  
clipboard is lost.  
CAD (computer aided design - pronounced “kad”): A  
computerized system used to design products. CAD  
systems are high speed workstations or PCs that use CAD  
software and input devices, such as graphic tables and  
scanners.  
Clock: A timing signal generated by an oscillating circuit  
that is used to synchronize data transmissions.  
Callback security: A security feature available in some  
intelligent modems that stores phone numbers. When  
activated, the user calling the secured modem must furnish  
a recognized password and then provide a code that  
corresponds to one of the stored phone numbers. When  
these security measures are met, the secured modem  
hangs up on the caller and dials the appropriate number to  
establish a data communications link.  
Command: An instruction that tells a computer to begin,  
continue, or end a specific operation.  
Command mode: One of two states of an intelligent  
(programmable) device. The mode in which commands can  
be issued to alter operating parameters.  
Communications Server: Also known as the Async  
Gateway, it is a PC equipped with the appropriate hardware  
and software package so it can function as a gateway  
between a LAN and its modems or host connections.  
Capacitor: An electronic device that stores an electrical  
charge. It comes in varying sizes for use in anything from  
power supplies to the tiny cells in dynamic RAM chips.  
When the device is powered down, it’s capacitors lose their  
charge.  
COMx Port: A serial communications port on a PC.  
CONFIG.SYS file (pronounced “config dot sis”): A text  
file that contains configuration commands used when you  
start your computer. Commands in the CONFIG.SYS file  
enable or disable system features, set limits or resources,  
and extend the operating system’s purpose by loading  
device drivers.  
Carrier signal: An analog signal with known frequency,  
amplitude and phase characteristics used as a transport  
facility for useful information. By knowing the original  
characteristics, a receiver can interpret any changes as  
modulations, and thereby recover the information.  
Character set: One of a number of coding schemes which  
uses binary digits to represent characters, numbers,  
punctuation, and/or control characters. Common character  
sets are ASCII, ANSI, and EBCDIC.  
Cooked data: A term used in UNIX communications to  
identify the UNIX command-line data transmitted. This type  
of data is noted for a reduction in effective throughput  
because it has to be processed, or “cooked” prior to trans-  
mission. Compare with raw data.  
Checksum: A control field found in synchronous data  
packets which contain the results of the error control  
algorithm used.  
CPU (central processing unit): The computing part of the  
computer. It is made up of the control unit and the ALU  
(arithmetic logic unit). The CPU, clock and main memory  
make up a computer. When you turn on your computer, an  
electrical signal follows a permanently programmed path to  
the CPU to clear the leftover data from the chips’ internal  
memory registers.  
Chip: Also called integrated circuits (IC), they are squares  
or rectangles that contain from a few dozen to a few million  
electronic components.  
CHKDSK (pronounced “check disk”): An external DOS  
command that reports free memory and disk space.  
CHKDSK must be run directly from DOS or within a batch  
file.  
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): A field used in  
packetized data that contains two 8-bit BCCs (Block Check  
Characters) as the binary result of an algorithm performed  
on the data bits in the packet. A CRC is used for error  
detection by many synchronous protocols.  
Circuit: Any closed path through which electrical current  
can flow.  
Circuit-switched Network: A technology used by the  
PSTN that allocates a pair of conductors for the exclusive  
use of one communication path. Circuit switching allows  
CTS (Clear To Send signal): With communications be-  
tween modems, an RSs-232 signal sent from the modem to  
the DTE that indicates it is ready to accept data. Contract  
multiple conversations on one talk path only if the end-users with RTS.  
multiplex the signals prior to transmission.  
D
Circuit switching: The temporary connection of two or  
DAA (Data Access Arrangement): The circuitry to isolate  
any device from phone lines and their associated equip-  
ment.  
more communications channels using a fixed, non-share-  
able path through the network. Users have full use of the  
circuit until the connection is terminated.  
Daisy-chain: A method of connecting multiple devices in a  
series, one after another.  
Clipboard: An electronic holding place for the most recent  
cur or copy made from a document. Whatever is on the  
172  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Data compression: The process of reducing the data bits  
necessary to represent useful information. By compressing  
files, less storage is required and higher throughputs are  
realized.  
of as a file drawer.  
DOS (Disk Operating System - pronounced “daws”):  
The software that allows all the hardware in a PC to inter-  
act. The basis for (DOS prompt) higher level applications.  
Data Pump: The DAC (Digital-to-Analog Conversion)  
circuitry used within a modem.  
DOS prompt: The > symbol displayed after the disk drive  
letter.  
DB-25: A very common 25-pin connector often referred to  
as an RSs-232 connector because it is the connector over  
which the RS-232 interface commonly occurs.  
DPSK (Differential Phase Shift Keying): A common form  
of phase modulation used in modems. It does not require  
complex demodulation circuitry and is not susceptible to  
random phase changes in the transmitted waveform, thus  
reducing errors during transmission.  
DB (Direct Current): Usually understood to mean a  
constant voltage supply that fluctuates only a nominal  
amount. An analog or digital signal that may vary in voltage  
level, but it never crosses the reference voltage (usually  
called ground). Contrast with AC>  
Driver: A software module that interfaces between the  
Operating System and a specific hardware device, such as  
a color monitor, printer or hard disk. Also known as a device  
driver.  
De facto standards: A de facto standard is one of two  
types of voluntary standards recognized by a given market.  
It is introduced by a single vendor and becomes a standard  
by its widespread use and acceptance by other vendors.  
AT&T’s Bell 212A, IBM’s Binary Synchronous Protocol, or  
DEC’s VT-100 terminal protocol are examples of de facto  
standards. Compare with de jure standards.  
DSR (Data Set Ready): An RS-232 signal sent from the  
modem to the computer or terminal indicating that it is able  
to accept data. Contrast with DTR.  
DTE (Data Terminating Equipment): A term used to  
include any device in a network which generates, stores, or  
displays user information. DTE is a telecommunications  
term which usually refers to PCs, terminals, printers, etc.  
De jure standards: A de jure standard is one of two types  
of voluntary standards. It represents the collective consen-  
sus of the industry and users for a particular aspect of  
manufacturing. CCITT’s V and X standards (V.32 and  
Xx.25) are examples of de jure standards. Compare with de  
factor standards.  
DTMF (Dual-Tone MultiFrequency): A generic push-button  
concept made popular by AT&T TouchTone.  
DTR (Data Terminal Ready): An RS-232 signal sent from  
the computer or terminal to the modem indicating that it is  
able to accept data.  
Decibel (dB): A unit of measurement for signal strength  
based on logarithmic increments, A decibel is a relative  
measurement that is derived from an initial reference level  
and a final observed level.  
E
EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange  
Code - pronounced “eb suh dick”): An IBM character  
code used in its mainframe and midrange computers. It is  
an 8-bit code (256 combinations) that stores one alphanu-  
meric character or two decimal digits within a byte. EBCDIC  
and ASCII codes are the most common codes used to  
represent data.  
Default: A preset value or option, in software packages, or  
in hardware configuration, that is used unless you specify  
otherwise.  
Device driver: Software that controls how a computer  
communicates with a device, such as a printer or mouse.  
Digital signal: Digital devices, such as terminals and  
Echo: The reflection or duplication of a signal back toward  
computers, transmit data as a series of electrical pulses that its source. Echoing is useful when a terminal is transmitting  
have discrete jumps rather than gradual changes.  
data, in that the data can be echoed to the screen so the  
user can monitor what is being sent. Echoing is undesirable  
when it refers to the signal which results on a telephone line  
from impedance mismatches.  
Digital Transmission: A method of electronic information  
transmission common between computers and other digital  
devices. Analog signals are waveforms: a combination of  
many possible voltages. A computer’s digital signal may be  
only “high” or “low” at any given time. Therefore, digital  
signals may be “cleaned up” (noise and distortion removed)  
and amplified during transmission.  
Echo cancellation: a high speed modem technique that  
isolates and filters out unwanted signals caused by echoes  
from the main transmitted signal. This allows full-duplex  
modems to send and receive on the same frequency  
carrier.  
DIP switch: A set of tiny toggle switches, built into a DIP  
(dual in-line package), used for setting configurable param-  
eters on a PCB (printed circuit board).  
EIA (Electronics Industries Association); A membership  
organization founded in 1924 that includes manufacturers of  
electronic parts and systems. With over 1200 members, it  
sponsors shows and seminars, gives awards for outstand-  
Directory: A logical subdivision of a computer’s disk space  
used to organize a group of files. A directory can be thought  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ing contributions in electronics, and sets electronic interface from its ability to be erased “in a flash”. Flash memory is  
standards, such as RS-23.  
derived form EEPROM, but are less expensive and provide  
higher bit densities.  
EISA (Enhanced Industry Standard Architecture -  
pronounced “eesa”): The purpose of the EISA bus was to  
Floppy Disk: Also called a diskette. It is a round disk with a  
provide a 32-bit bus for faster throughputs while maintaining hole in the middle, made of flexible material and houses in a  
backward compatibility with the classic ISA bus architec-  
ture.  
square envelope or cartridge. A disk drive holds the floppy  
disk through the hole in its center and spins it within its  
envelope. They can be used over and over again. Contrast  
with hard disk.  
Emulation: The process of one type of device imitating  
another via a hardware or software package. Terminal  
emulation, for example, allows a PC to access a mainframe  
computer by generating and accepting data like a “dumb”  
terminal.  
Flow control: The process of regulating the speed at which  
data enters or leaves a serial port. Software flow control is  
implemented by communications software or by the user  
sending predefined characters or packets which are recog-  
nized as “pause” and “resume” indicators. Hardware flow  
control is achieved by using the RTS (request to send) and  
the CTS (clear to send) control lines of the RS-232 inter-  
face.  
Environment: A computer configuration that includes the  
CPU model and system software (operating system, data  
communications and database systems). It may also  
include the programming language used. It sets the stan-  
dards for the applications that run in it.  
Footprint: The desk or floor space that a piece of hardware  
occupies. Also referred to as “real estate”.  
EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory -  
pronounced “eeprom”): A reusable PROM chip that holds  
its contents until erased under ultraviolet light.  
Foreground: The application program currently running on,  
and in control of, the PC screen and keyboard. The area of  
the screen that occupies the active window. Compare with  
background.  
Error correction: The process of detecting distorted data  
bits and requesting a retransmission or interpretation to  
correct the error. Errors are introduced by bad line condi-  
tions or external interface.  
Format: 1. The way text is set up on a page.  
2. To prepare a disk for holding information. Formatting a  
disk can delete all information on it.  
F
Fax (facsimile): Refers to the bit-mapped rendition of a  
graphics-oriented document (fax) or to the electronic  
transmission of the image over telephone lines (faxing). Fax  
transmission differs from data transmission in that the  
former is a bit-mapped approximation of a graphical docu-  
ment and, therefore, cannot be accurately interpreted  
according to any character code.  
3. The information is structured in a file, often specific to  
one application or protocol.  
Frequency: A characteristic of an electrical or electronic  
signal which describes the periodic recurrence of cycles.  
Frequency is inversely proportional to the wavelength or  
pulse width of the signal.  
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying): A technology that estab-  
lishes two frequencies used to represent binary values. This  
was the earliest type of modulation used by 300 bps  
modems.  
Fax card: An expansion card that, with the appropriate  
software, allows a PC to operate as a fax transmitter/  
receiver. PC fax cards may be able to send and receive  
faxes from a file on the PC. If an external scanner is avail-  
able, the PC can also transmit the scanned image via the  
fax card.  
Full-duplex: A method of transmitting and receiving data  
simultaneously over a single pair of wires. Compare with  
Half-Duplex.  
Fax/Data-Modem: A multifunctional device capable of  
transmitting either data or faxes. It is available as an  
external unit or expansion board. It includes a fax switch  
that routes the call to the fax or the data modem.  
G
Gateway: A workstation, which serves as a protocol con-  
verter (translator) between two or more dissimilar networks,  
providing incompatible systems.  
Fax server: A network resource that allows workstation  
PCs to transmit faxes as though the PC had an internal fax  
card or a fax modem attached.  
H
Half-Duplex: The transmission of data in both directions,  
but only one direction at a time. Compare with Full-Duplex.  
Firmware: A category of memory chips that hold their  
content without electrical power. They include ROM, PROM,  
EPROM, and EEPROM technologies. Firmware becomes  
“hard software” when holding program code.  
Handshaking: A process that two modems go through at  
the time of call setup to establish synchronization over the  
data communications link. It is a synchronization and  
negotiation process, accomplished by the exchange of  
predefined, mutually recognized control codes.  
Flash Memory: A memory chip that holds its content  
without power, but must be erased in bulk. The term comes  
174  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Hard Disk: A metal disk covered with magnetic recording  
material. Some can hold up to several gigabytes of informa-  
tion. Contrast with floppy disk.  
and data over a digital communications line.  
ISI (Intelligent Serial Interface): Multi-Tech’s multiport  
serial card with an on-board processor and 50K or RAM for  
data buffering. The ISI does more than provide additional  
serial ports; it enhances serial port performance with the  
data buffering, and it holds the data it receives until an  
entire block can be transferred to the processor. This allows  
the computer’s processor to be interrupted less often, so it  
can perform more efficiently.  
Hardware: The equipment that makes up your computer  
system, including the keyboard, mouse, disk drives, and  
monitor.  
Hexadecimal: A base 16 numbering system used to  
represent binary values. Hex uses the numbers 0-9 and the  
letters A-f; usually notated by an “h” (as in “4CF h”, read as  
“four charley fox, hex”). The result is that one hex digit  
represents a four-bit value.  
J
Job: The unit of work being processed by the computer.  
Host: The computer that is designated as retaining informa-  
tion or processing power to service the needs of other  
computers or terminal. Mainframes and mid-range comput-  
ers are hosts, as well as PCs with powerful microproces-  
sors. Often a PC on a LAN will be set up as a host to  
provide LAN access for remote users.  
K
Kermit: An asynchronous file transfer protocol noted for its  
accuracy over noisy lines.  
Kernel: The core of an operating system which interacts  
directly with the system hardware. While most operating  
systems are based on the concept of a kernel, the term is  
best recognized as a fundamental of the UNIX operating  
system. Kernels have been expanded to include commonly-  
used utilities, but with the advent of the “micro kernel”, the  
original modular design of UNIX is being revived.  
I
I/O Addresses: Locations within the I/O address space of  
your computer used by a device, such as an expansion  
card, a serial port, or an internal modem. The address is  
used for communication between software and a device.  
Kilobit: One thousand bits. A unit of measure for digital  
data rates.  
Initialize: To begin anew and establish start-up parameters.  
This typically involves clearing all or some part of the  
device’s memory or disk space.  
Kilobyte: One thousand bytes. A unit of measure for digital  
data rates. Not to be confused with “K”, which stands for z10  
bytes of storage space, either in memory or on disk. 1K of  
disk space is actually 1024 bytes. 16K is 65,536 bytes, and  
1M (meg) is 1,048,576 bytes.  
Interface: A common meeting ground supplied by hardware  
or software to facilitate a compatible connection and  
operation between two devices or programs. For example,  
when two PCs are connected they use a common interface  
across the physical connectors so that the signals being  
sent and received are accurately interpreted. With software,  
an interface is a module created to be “written to.” That is, if  
two programs are written to the same interface, they can be  
successfully linked together.  
L
LAM (Line Adapter Module): The cabling that connects the  
phone line to the PCMCIA modem card.  
LAN Card: An IC Card that complies with the PCMCIA Card  
Services Interface Specification, Release 2.0. LAN cards  
can be connected to laptops or palmtop computers which,  
in turn, can be interconnected to local LAN services.  
IPX (Internet Packet Exchange): A data transport protocol  
developed by Novell used to route messages from one  
node to another. Application programs that manage their  
own client/server or peer-to-peer communications in a  
Novell network can access IPX directly. IPX does not  
guarantee the delivery of a message. Compare with SPX.  
Leased Line: A private, dedicated communications channel  
that connects two locations. This connection lasts for the  
duration of the subscription. Leased lines may be condi-  
tioned to improve line quality over that of dial-up lines.  
IRQ Level (Interrupt Request Level): The notification a  
processor receives when another portion of the computer’s  
hardware requires its attention. IRQs are numbered so that  
the device issuing the IRQ can be identified, and so IRQs  
can be prioritized.  
Line Conditioning: An additional cost option offered by the  
telephone company for their leased, voice-grade lines. The  
service provides a careful balance of line enhancements to  
improve the frequency response and to reduce distortion.  
ISA (Industry Standards Architecture - pronounced “ice LPTx (Line Printer): The parallel port interface on a PC. It  
a”): The classic 8 or 16-bit architecture introduced with  
IBM’s PC-AT computer. Due to speed constraints, IBM  
provides a 25-pin connector for parallel transfer of data and  
printer controls, commonly used for parallel printers. A  
introduced a restructured Micro Channel Architecture with a maximum of four I/O addresses are set with DOS param-  
32-bit bus and increased addressing capabilities.  
eters LPT1, LPT2, LPT3 and LPT4.  
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): International  
telecommunications standard for transmitting voice, video  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check): An error check-  
ing method that generates a parity bit from the specified  
string of bits on a longitudinal track. In a row and column  
format such as on magnetic tape, LRC is often used with  
VRC, which creates a parity bit for each character.  
computer’s digital signals into analog signals to send over a  
telephone line and converts them back to digital signals at  
the receiving end. Modems can be internal and fit into an  
expansion slot, or external and connect to a serial port.  
Modulation: The process of encoding information from one  
signal (called the source) into another (called the carrier) by  
modifying some characteristic(s) of the carrier. It is often  
used in telecommunications when one type of signal must  
be converted for transmission over an otherwise incompat-  
ible medium.  
M
Macro: A series of keystrokes, commands, and/or menu  
selections that have been recorded and assigned a key or  
key combination. When those keys are pressed, the macro  
is executed from beginning to end.  
Multiplexer (mux): A device that merges several signals  
into one composite signal for transmission over a single  
medium or channel. A de-multiplexer (usually built into a  
mux) reverses the process at the receiving end.  
Magnetic Disk: A non-volatile computer storage device that  
uses one or more magnetic-coated disk platters that can be  
recorded over and over again. Hard disks, minifloppies (5-1/  
4”) and microfloppies (3-1/2”) are examples of magnetic  
disks.  
N
Mainframe: A large, powerful computer used to centralize a NAK (Negative Acknowledgment): Communications code  
data processing environment. It has hundreds of gigabytes  
of storage space. It uses a frond end processor to connect  
directly to the communications channels that interconnect  
terminals and computers.  
used to indicate that a message was not properly received  
or that a terminal does not want to transmit. Contrast with  
ACK.  
Network: A group of computers connected by cables or  
other means and using software that enables them to share  
equipment, such as printers and disk drives to exchange  
information.  
Megabyte: One million bytes, when describing a data rate.  
1M of disk space may actually mean 1,048,576 bytes.  
Mid-range computer: A term coined by IBM, referring to  
any of their Advanced Business Systems computers. This  
product line was originally called their mini-computers, but  
as the number of supported users approached mainframe  
capabilities, the term “mid-range” caught on.  
NIC (Network Interface Card - pronounced “nick”): A  
printed circuit board that provides the physical and electrical  
connection between a PC and a network device (like a file  
server) via a network media (like Arcnet UTP).  
MI/MIC (mode indicate/mode indicate common inter-  
face): A user definable feature that defines various combi-  
nations of edge or level detection in Originate or Answer  
mode, with the Ring Indicator (RI) pulse enabled or dis-  
abled.  
Node: Any point within a network which has been assigned  
an address.  
Normal mode: In modem operation, this refers to a mode  
of operation without error correction active.  
O
Mnemonics: A term assigned to a complex idea, value, or  
list of information which is found to be representative of that OCR (Optical Character Recognition): The recognition of  
information. Computer commands are almost entirely  
mnemonics. Mnemonics are used as memory aids for  
people.  
printed characters and subsequent translation into charac-  
ter code for use on a computer. OCR systems can recog-  
nize many different fonts, as well as typewriter and com-  
puter-printed characters. Advanced OCR systems can  
recognize hand printing.  
MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol): A family of  
communications protocols from Microcom that have be-  
come de facto standards for error correction and data  
compression.  
Off-hook: The condition of a device which has accessed a  
phone line (with or without using the line). In modem use,  
this is equivalent to a telephone handset being picked up.  
Dialing and transmission are allowed, but incoming calls are  
not answered.  
MNP Class 3&4: The de facto error correction standard  
from Microcom.  
MNP Class 5: The most widely used data compression  
scheme before V.42bis took hold. MNP5 offers “2-to-1” data  
compression.  
OS (Operating System): The master control program that  
runs a computing system. It is the first program loaded  
when the computer is turned on, and its main part is called  
the kernel and resides in the memory at all times.  
MNP Class 7: MNP’s “3-to-1” data compression scheme.  
MNP7 never became a de facto standard because of  
V.42bis “4-to-1” compression.  
Modem: A communications device that enables a computer  
to transmit information over a telephone line. It converts the  
176  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
P
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network): A world-  
wide public voice telephone network that is used as a  
telecommunications medium for the transmission of voice,  
data and other information.  
Parameter: 1. A “place holder” in a command that should  
be substituted with useful information. 2. The list of accept-  
able values for a given option or command.  
Pulse dialing: One of two methods of dialing a telephone,  
usually associated with rotary dial phones. Compare with  
tone dialing.  
Parity bit: An extra bit attached to each byte of synchro-  
nous data used to detect errors in transmission.  
PCB (Printed Circuit Board): A flat board that holds chips  
and other electronic components. The board is “printed”  
with electrically conductive pathways between components.  
The main PCB in a system is called a motherboard and the  
smaller PCBs that plug into the slots in the motherboard are  
called daughter boards or cards.  
Pulse-width: Pertaining to a digital signal. Pulse width  
refers to the duration of one state between clocking signals.  
Pulse width roughly corresponds to an analog signal’s  
wavelength.  
Q
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card Interna-  
tional Association): An organization of U.S. and Japanese  
companies set up to standardize memory cards and other  
architecture-independent expansion devices. These cards  
are typically used in laptop computers.  
QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation): A complex  
method of modulation that establishes twelve phase angles  
and four amplitudes, designating sixteen possible combina-  
tions. QAM encodes hexadecimal values (also called  
quadbits) into one cycle of the carrier. Using a 1800 bps  
carrier frequency and a 2400 baud signaling rate, QAM  
provides a 9600 bps modulation speed. However, because  
it uses amplitude modulation, QAM is susceptible to noise.  
Phase: The timing of a signal based upon the starting point  
of each cycle in another signal. To be detected, phase  
requires the comparing of two signals. If the cycle of two  
signals begin at the same point, they are said to be “in-  
phase”. In-phase signals add, while out-of-phase signals  
tend to cancel each other.  
Queue: A set of activities that are waiting in chronological  
order for an action, such as printing, to be performed.  
R
Port: A location for input or output data exchange. Comput-  
ers, muxes, etc., have ports for various purposes.  
Rack: A frame or cabinet into which components are  
mounted. The industry standard rack is 19” wide and has  
variable depth and height.  
Print Server: A computer in a network that controls one or  
more printers. It stores the print image output from all users  
of the system and feeds it to the printer one job at a time.  
The print server may be part of the network operating  
system or an add-on utility.  
Rackmount: A packaging style available for many types of  
electronic equipment which enables the installer to mount  
the equipment in an industry standardized enclosure. The  
rackmount equipment is fitted with brackets, rather than  
being packages in its own enclosure. Rackmounting  
conserves disk and floor space (real estate) and often  
conserves power outlets.  
Program: A collection of computer instructions that tell the  
computer what to do.  
PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory): A permanent  
memory chip that can be programmed or filled by the  
customer after the manufacturer has set initial values.  
Contrast with ROM.  
RAM (Random Access Memory): A computer’s primary  
workspace. All data must be stored in RAM (even for a  
short while) before software can use the processor to  
manipulate the data. Before a PC can do anything useful, it  
must move programs from disk to RAM. When you turn it  
off, all information in RAM is lost.  
Prompt: A request for information from the PC that provides  
required input or information.  
Protocol: A set of rules that defines how computing devices  
communicate with each other. The rules governing the  
transmitting and receiving of data.  
Reboot: Restarting your PC by turning off the power and  
then turning it back on, or by pressing Alt,Ctrl and Del keys  
at the same time. Warm boot=Ctrl+Alt+Del (soft boot) or  
Cold boot=Power switch (hard boot).  
PSK (Phase Shift Keying): A modulation technique which  
establishes two-bit elements, called “dibits” yielding four  
possible combinations: 00,01,10,11. These element are  
then represented by 90, 180 and 270 degree angles. PSK  
produces the appropriate shift in phase relative to the  
original carrier. Differential PSK replaces this technology  
because it is less prone to error. Modems using PSK  
normally operate at 1200 bps.  
Repeater: A device that amplifies or regenerates the data  
signal in order to extend the distance of the transmission.  
This can be used with both analog and digital signals, and is  
used extensively in long distance transmission to keep  
signals from losing their strength.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Resolution: Indicates the number of dots that make up an  
image on a screen or printer. The more dots, the higher the  
resolution, and the finer and smoother the images can  
appear when displayed at a given size.  
of transparently disabling the “g” protocol used by UUCP  
and substituting the modem’s own error correction protocol  
for data integrity. The process “spoofs” the UNIX host into  
transmitting data faster than normal, because the acknowl-  
edgments are actually sent by the modem instead of the  
remote UNIX computer.  
RJ-11: An industry standard interface used for connecting a  
telephone to a modular wall outlet; comes in 4-and 6-wire  
packages.  
Spooling (Simultaneous Peripheral Operations On-line):  
Overlapping a low-speed operation with normal processing,  
such as printing a file or document in the background while  
creating a new document in the foreground.  
RJ-45: An 8-wire modular connector for voice and data  
circuits.  
ROM (Read Only Memory): A memory chip that perma-  
nently stores instructions and data. Its contents are created  
at the time it is manufactured and cannot be altered. ROM  
is used to store control routines in PCs and peripheral  
controllers. It is also used in the plug-in cartridges for  
printers and video games. A set of ROM chips contains the  
basic input/output system (BIOS).  
SPX (Sequenced Packet Exchange): A data transport  
protocol developed by Novell used for interprocess commu-  
nications. It guarantees that an entire message arrives  
intact and uses the NetWare IPX protocol as its delivery  
mechanism.  
Switch Line: In communications, a physical channel  
established by dynamically connecting one or more discreet  
segments. This connection lasts for the duration of the call  
after which each segment may be used as part of a different  
channel. Contrast with leased line.  
RS232-C: An EIA standard for a serial interface between  
computers and peripheral devices (modem, mouse, etc.). It  
uses a 25-pin DB-25, or a 9-pin DB-9 connector. The  
RS232 standard defines the purposes, electrical character-  
istics and timing of the signals for each of the 25 lines.  
Switched Network: A network in which a temporary  
connection is established from one point via one or more  
segments.  
RTS (Request To Send signal): With communications  
between modems, an RS232 signal sent from the DTE to  
the modem requesting permission to transmit. Contrast with Synchronous Transmission: The transmission of data,  
CTS.  
which involves sending a group of characters in a packet.  
This is a common method of transmission between comput-  
ers on a network or between modems. One or more syn-  
chronous characters are transmitted to confirm clocking  
before each packet of data is transmitted. Compare to  
Asynchronous Transmission.  
S
Scanner: A hardware device that can “read” a photograph  
or other piece of artwork and transforms it into a collection  
of dots that can be stored as a bit-mapped file on a hard  
drive. It can then be manipulated into various software  
programs and placed electronically in a page layout pro-  
gram.  
T
T1 Transmission: A standard transmission speed of  
1.544M bps that may be used in its full bandwidth, or as  
narrower channels called “fractional T1” carriers.  
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control): In IBM’s SNA  
networks, this is the primary data link protocol.  
TCM (Trellis Coded Modulation): An error correction  
method that allows the receiving modem to tell if a signal  
element is in error, based on the value of the preceding  
signal elements. Each signal element is assigned a coded  
binary value representing the element’s phase and ampli-  
tude.  
Serial Port: The connector on a PC used to attach a serial  
device (a device that needs to receive data one bit after  
another), such as a mouse, printer or modem. It consists of  
a 9- or 25-pin connector that sends data in sequence. Serial  
ports are referred to as “COMx” ports, where x is 1 to 4  
(COM1 through COM4). A serial port contains a conversion  
chip called a UART, which translates between internal  
parallel and external serial formats.  
Terminal: The screen and keyboard device used in a  
centralized computing environment for interactive data  
entry. Terminals have no “box”, which is to say they have no  
file storage or processing capabilities.  
Server: A computer that provides disk space, printer  
access, or other shared services, to computers over a  
network.  
Terminal emulation: Allows a PC to access a mainframe  
computer by generating and accepting data like a “dumb”  
terminal.  
Software: The set of instructions that make computer  
hardware perform tasks. Programs, operating systems,  
device drivers and applications are all software.  
Threshold: A value or condition which, when reached,  
triggers an event.  
Spoofing: A command recognized by modems which have  
been manufactured specifically for use within the UNIX  
UUCP (UNIX to UNIX Copy) facility. Spoofing is the process  
178  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Toggle: Alternate back and forth between two states.  
V.27: The CCITT modulation standard for 4800 bps, full or  
half-duplex transmission. Primarily for synchronous use.  
Not common in North America. V.27ter is used by Group 2  
fax-modems for 4800 bps fax transmission.  
Tone dialing: One of two methods of dialing a telephone,  
usually associated with push button phones. Compare with  
pulse dialing.  
V.29: The CCITT modulation standard for 9600 bps, 2-wire  
(half-duplex) or 4-wire (full-duplex) transmissions, primarily  
over leased lines (synchronous or asynchronous). V.29 is  
used for Group 3 fax transmissions.  
Transistor: A semiconductor device used to amplify a  
signal, or open and close a circuit. In digital computers, it  
functions as an electronic switch.  
TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident): A software program  
that remains active and in memory after its user interface is  
closed. Similar to a daemon in UNIX environments.  
V.32: The CCITT modulation standard for synchronous or  
asynchronous input to be transmitted at 9600 bps over the  
PSTN. V.32 operates in half- or full-duplex mode.  
Twisted pair wiring: A type of cabling with one or more  
pairs of insulated wires wrapped around each other. An  
inexpensive wiring method used for LAN and telephone  
applications, also called UTP wiring.  
V.32bis: The CCITT modulation standard for synchronous  
or asynchronous input to be transmitted at 14,400 bps over  
the PSTN. V.32bis operates in half- or full-duplex mode.  
V.32terbo: An AT&T recommendation for synchronous or  
asynchronous input to be transmitted at 14,400 bps over  
the PSTN. V32terbo operates in half- or full-duplex mode.  
U
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter):  
A chip that transmits and receives data on the serial port. It  
converts bytes into serial bits for transmission, and vice  
versa, and generates and strips the start and stop bits  
appended to each character.  
V.32: The CCITT modulation standard for synchronous or  
asynchronous input to be transmitted at 9600 bps over the  
PSTN. V.32 operates in half- or full-duplex mode.  
V.33: A CCITT modulation standard for 14,400 bps synchro-  
nous transmission over a 40wire leased line.  
UNIX: A multi-user, multitasking operating system, first  
developed by AT&T in the 1970’s. It now runs on a wide  
variety of computer systems from micro to mainframe, and  
is controlled by UNIX System Laboratories (USL).  
V.35: The CCITT hardware interface specification com-  
monly used by DSU/CSUs and other high-speed devices.  
UTP (unshielded twisted pair): Telephone-type wiring.  
V.42: A CCITT recommendation for error-control hardware  
on a modem that accepts asynchronous input. V.42 recom-  
mends for manufactures to implement LAP-M and makes a  
provision for MNP-5 as a alternative because of its popular-  
ity. Most modem makers provide both.  
V
V.21: The CCITT modulation standard for 300 bps, full-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines.  
V.22: The CCITT modulation standard for 1200 bps, full-  
duplex transmission over a dial-up or 2-wire leased line.  
This is not common in North America.  
V.42bis: A CCITT recommendation for data compressing  
hardware on a modem that accepts asynchronous input.  
V.42bis is based on a dynamically updated dictionary that  
looks up common strings and replaces the strings with code  
words. This reduces the amount of characters actually  
transmitted. V.42bis has been found to be most effective for  
V.22bis: The CCITT modulation standard for 2400 bps, full-  
duplex transmission over a dial-up or a 2-wire leased line.  
V.23: The CCITT modulation standard for 75/1200 bps, half- file transfers that contain long strings of repetitive informa-  
duplex transmission over dial-up lines. This is not common  
in North America.  
tion and least effective for short strings of unique data.  
V.54: The CCITT recommendation to standardize Bit Error  
Rate Testing (BERT) and Loopback testing (Local Analog  
and Digital Loopback, as well as Remote Analog and Digital  
Loopback).  
V.24: The CCITT hardware interface specification for  
interchange circuits between the DTE and DCE.  
V.25bis: A dialing command set developed by the CCITT for  
both synchronous and asynchronous devices. Since  
V.25bis does not provide any modem configuration com-  
mands, it is primarily used for its synchronous dialing  
commands, while the “AT” commands are used for asyn-  
chronous dialing and for modem configuration.  
VRC (Vertical Redundancy Check): An error checking  
method that generates and tests a parity bit for each byte of  
data that is moved or transmitted.  
W
WATS (Wide Area Telephone Service): A discounted long-  
distance calling plan that allows calls in or out. The popular  
800 numbers are WATS lines in. The calls are charges to  
the holder of the 800 number at a discounted rate.  
V.26: The CCITT modulation standard for 2400 bps, full-  
duplex transmission over 4-wire leased lines. Primarily for  
synchronous use. Not common in North America.  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Workstation: Traditionally a dumb terminal connected to a  
host. However, with the advent of LANS and WANS, PCs  
that are connected to a LAN are now called workstations  
too, even though they are capable of independent process-  
ing. A workstation is simply an input/display device through  
which a user accesses a resource.  
X
X.121: CCITT’s recommendation for unique addressing of  
each DTE connected to a communications network through-  
out the world. X.121 uses fifteen digits: a one-digit prefix, a  
four-digit DNIC number (which identifies the country and  
PDN), and a ten-digit national terminal number.  
X.21: CCITT’s recommendation for a 15-pin, digital inter-  
face. It is not widely accepted, because of the analog loops  
still prevalent in data communications. For this reason,  
CCITT introduced the X21bis standard for use with synchro-  
nous modems.  
X.25: CCITT’s definition of a three-level packet-switching  
protocol to be used between packet-mode DTEs and  
network DCEs. X.25 corresponds with the lower three/four  
layers of the seven layer OSI model.  
X.28: CCITT’s definition of asynchronous commands used  
by a local ASCII terminal to configure an X.25 PAD.  
X.29: CCITT’s definition of packetized commands sent to  
configure a remote PAD via an X.25 link.  
XModem: A widely used asynchronous file transfer proto-  
col. Programs typically use both the older version,  
checksum, and the new version, CRC method, to detect  
errors. If CRC is not present at the other end of a file  
transfer, then it will use checksum.  
Y
YModem: An asynchronous file transfer protocol that  
improves speed by transmitting 1,024-byte (1K) blocks and  
batch file transfer.  
Z
ZModem: An asynchronous file transfer protocol that is  
more efficient than XModem. It sends file name, date and  
size first, and responds well to changing line conditions due  
to its variable length blocks. It uses CRC error correction  
and is effective in delay-induced satellite transmission.  
180  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
F, 74  
G, 80  
H, 67, 108  
I, 78  
implementing, 92  
J, 80  
K, 81  
L, 67, 82, 108  
L6, 95  
M, 82  
N, 75, 77  
O, 81, 107  
P, 68  
parameters, 64  
Q, 72, 79  
A
Abort Timer, 104  
abort timer, 64, 69  
Answer command, 81, 108  
answer mode, 81  
Answer Tone command, 74  
Answering a call, 87, 101, 159  
automatically, 108  
manually, 108  
answering a call, 81  
ASCII code, 148  
asynchronous communications mode, 73  
Asynchronous Communications Mode command command,  
73  
AT commands  
, (comma), 68, 85  
! (exclamation mark), 69  
%B, 73  
%C, 77  
&B, 78  
S =, 87  
S ?, 87  
T, 68, 75  
V, 68, 72, 106  
W, 68  
X, 68, 80, 96  
Y, 75  
&C, 76  
&D, 76, 103  
&F, 71, 88, 91  
&G, 75  
&J, 80  
&K, 79  
&M, 79  
&P, 149  
&Q, 73  
&S, 76  
Z, 71  
auto answer, 83, 87  
disabling, 83  
Auto Retrain command, 78  
Auto-Protocol Detection, 105  
Auto-Protocol detection, 105  
auto-reliable mode, 77  
Autoanswer, 101, 103, 108, 159  
Auxiliary Relay Control command, 80  
&T, 82  
B
&V, 78  
&W, 71, 87, 88, 98  
&Y, 71  
backspace character, 65, 84  
Bearer Service, 137  
blacklist, 73  
blind dialing, 67, 72  
Break signal, 92  
&Zn=, 108  
&Zn=s, 70  
&Zn?, 108  
+++AT<CR>, 81, 100, 107, 161  
+ES=6, 81  
-C, 74  
break signal, 75  
busy signal, 67, 69, 72, 73, 85  
; (semicolon), 69  
<BREAK>AT<CR>, 100, 161  
@, 69  
^, 69  
A, 64, 81, 108  
A/, 78  
AT, 64, 65  
attention code, 64, 65  
B, 74  
C
Calling procedure, 107  
Canadian Limitations Notice, 167  
Canceling a call, 107  
carriage return character, 84  
carrier control, 74  
Carrier Detect Control command, 76  
carrier, loss of, 85  
C, 74  
CBX phone systems, 76  
CD signal  
control of, 76  
Carrier Control, 74  
command string limit, 64  
D, 67, 107  
DSn, 70  
E, 72, 95  
entering, 90  
comma, 85  
command buffer, 65  
Command mode, 107  
command mode, 64  
182  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
command string, 64  
Communications Mode command, 79  
ConfigMenu  
starting, 102, 163  
Configuration, 102, 163  
configuration  
E
Echo Command Mode Characters command, 72  
Echo commands, 95, 160  
Echo Online Data Characters command, 74  
Embedded Protocol Analyzer, 94  
En bloc sending, 92  
view current, 78  
enable / disable V.32bis and V.22bis auto rate, 86  
enable / disable V.32bis start up auto mode, 86  
enable / disable V.34 modulation, 85  
Enable Synchronous Buffered Mode command, 81  
Error correction, 97  
error correction  
automatic, 77  
disabling, 77  
selecting, 77  
CTS (Clear to Send) signal, 99  
D
Data  
mode, 107  
Data Buffer Control command, 80  
Data call commands, 101  
data calling tone, 85  
Data Calling Tone command, 74  
Data Compression command, 77  
Data mode, returning to, 102, 160  
Data Set Ready Control command, 76  
Data Terminal Ready Control command, 76  
Determinign Current System Settings, 18  
diagnostic commands, 82  
Dial a Stored Number command, 70  
Dial command, 67, 107  
dial tone, 67  
Error Correction Modes command, 77  
Error Messages, 52  
Escape character, 92  
escape code character, 83  
Escape Sequence Options command, 100, 161  
Escape sequences, 102, 107, 160  
+++ AT<CR>, 100, 161  
<BREAK>AT<CR>, 100, 161  
options, 100, 161  
escape sequences, 81  
+++AT<CR>, 81  
Extended codes, 73  
extended result codes, 158  
wait time, 72, 73, 84  
dialing  
a phone number, 67  
a stored number, 70  
blind dialing, 67, 72  
modifiers, 67  
F
fax warning, 167  
pause time, 68, 85, 87  
FCC regulations, 166  
Flash On-Hook command, 69  
flow control, 79  
commands, 79  
disabling, 79  
smart dialing, 67, 72  
Dialing a Stored Telephone Number, 108  
Dialing a Stored Telephone Number (DS), 100  
Dialing Method  
AT command, 92  
selecting local, 79  
XON/XOFF pass through, 80  
Dialing Pause command, 68  
Disable Data Calling Tone Transmission command, 69  
Disabling a channel, 93  
Display Network Configuration commandI, 94  
Display Product Information command, 102, 160  
Displaying a stored number, 108  
DMS-100 switch type, 92, 93  
DSR (Data Set Ready) signal, 99  
DSR signal  
control of, 76  
DTMF (dual tone multifrequency)  
dialing, 68  
frequencies, 149  
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal, 100, 161  
DTR dialing, 100, 161  
G
Go Back Online command, 81  
Guard Tones command, 75  
H
handshake, 74  
handshake modulation, 75  
Hang Up command, 108  
hanging up, 67, 81  
Hardware flow control, 97  
Help File, 58  
DTR signal  
control of, 76  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I
P
in-band escape sequence, 81  
Inactivity Timer command, 75  
Information Request command, 78  
installation, 16, 17  
pacing, 79, 80  
Pacing commands, 98  
parameters, 64, 65, 71  
default, 65, 76  
Internet, 2  
IRQ Jumpers, 52  
ISDN Solutions Group, 138  
PBX phone systems, 67, 68  
Persistent DTR Dialing command, 100  
Profiles  
Quick Setup, 98  
pulse ratios, setting, 149  
Pulse-Dial command, 68  
L
Line feed character, 104  
line feed character, 84  
Q
List Telephone Numbers command, 108  
Load Default Configuration command, 71  
Load Profile command, 91  
Quick Setup, 98  
Quiet Answer command, 69  
Local Flow Control command, 79  
Local Flow Control Selection command, 79  
long space break, 75  
Long Space Disconnect command, 75  
Loop Qualification, 137  
R
Rate adaption protocol  
AT command, 95  
Recommended Base I/O Addres and IRQ Values, 18  
redial last number, 67  
reliable mode, 77  
M
manual organization, 10  
maximum dial line rate, 86  
memory  
nonvolatile (NVRAM), 65, 71, 88  
read-only (ROM), 65, 71  
Messages  
Repeat Last Command command, 78  
Reset Modem command, 71  
Response messages, 106  
Result codes, 72  
Connect Messages command, 96  
extended codes, 73  
response, 106  
result codes, 65, 72, 73  
enable/disable, 72  
extended codes, 73  
verbose/terse selection, 72  
Result Codes (Verbose/Terse) command, 72  
Result Codes and Call Progress Selection command, 68  
Result Codes Enable/Disable command, 72  
return character, 84  
ML-PPP protocol, 95, 161  
Modem Port Flow Control command, 80  
Modulation Handshake, 75  
Monitor Speaker Mode command, 82  
Monitor Speaker Volume command, 82  
N
Return Online command, 102, 160  
Return to Command Mode command, 69  
Ring count, 103  
rings  
counting, 83  
number till answer, 83, 87  
Rings, number before answering, 103  
ROM (read-only memory), 65, 71  
RS-232C, 76  
National ISDN Council (NIC), 143  
National ISDN Users Forum (NIUF), 143  
Network switch type  
AT command, 93  
NI-1 switch type, 93  
NVRAM (nonvolatile random access memory), 65, 71, 88  
O
off-line time, 87  
controls, 76  
On-Hook/Off-Hook command, 67  
Online command mode, 107  
online connection commands, 74  
online mode, 64, 81, 83  
Ordering Codes (IOCs), 138  
Ordering ISDN Without IOCs, 140  
Overlap sending, 92  
RTS/CTS flow control, 97  
S
S-registers, 87, 103  
definition, 83  
reading, 87  
S0, 83, 87, 101, 108, 159  
S1, 83  
S10, 85, 97, 99, 162  
184  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
S11, 85  
S2, 83  
View Current Configuration command, 78  
View Numbers in Blacklist command, 73  
S28, 85  
S3, 84  
W
S35, 85  
S37, 86  
S4, 84  
S42, 86  
S43, 86  
S5, 65, 84  
Wait for connection (Abort Timer), 104  
Wait for New Dial Tone command, 68  
wait timer, 84, 87  
wait-for-carrier mode, 64  
Wyse50 Terminal, 60  
S6, 67, 72, 73, 84  
S7, 64, 69, 84, 87  
S8, 68, 85, 87  
X
XON/XOFF, 80  
XON/XOFF flow control, 98  
XON/XOFF Pass-Through command, 80  
S89, 87  
Select Stored Configuration for Hard Reset command, 71  
Self-Test command, 82  
Serial port, 107  
Set Break Control, 81  
Set Pulse Dial Ratios command, 149  
smart dialing, 67, 72  
speaker settings, 82  
speaker volume  
setting, 82  
specifications, 12  
Speed  
serial port, 107  
Store Configuration command, 71, 88  
Store Phone Number command, 70  
Store Telephone Number command, 100, 159  
Stored number  
listing, 100, 163  
reading, 100, 163  
Storing  
profiles, 99  
telephone number, 100, 108, 163  
storing a configuration, 71, 87  
Switch configuration commands, 92  
Switch to Speakerphone Mode command, 68  
T
technical specifications, 12  
Telephone numbers, stored, 100, 161  
testing  
commands, 82  
tone dialing, 149  
Tone-Dial command, 68  
tone-dialing, 85  
Troubleshooting, 53  
U
Using ISDN Ordering Codes (IOCs), 138  
V
V.120 protocol, 95, 161  
V.42, 77  
Vendors’ ISDN Association (VIA), 143  
MultiModemISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
186  
MultiModem ISI Hybrid Series, ISIHI-2S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Ventilation Hood DA5321D User Manual
MTD Lawn Mower 060 Series User Manual
NETGEAR Network Card WN111v2 User Manual
Nokia Bluetooth Headset BH 904 User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone Nokia User Manual
Olympus DVR DS 10 User Manual
Omega Weather Radio DP26 TC User Manual
Oregon Scientific Automobile Accessories IBM80010 User Manual
Oricom Baby Monitor Secure 500 User Manual
Orion Car Audio Car Amplifier HCCA D1200 HCCA D2400 HCCA D5000 User Manual